A cordless drill and DIY go hand in hand, but there will be a time when even the best cordless drill simply doesn’t have the power to cope with a project. That’s when it's time to call in an SDS drill. This boasts what is known as a Slotted Drive System (hence the SDS moniker), which works differently from a standard cordless/corded drill with a grip chuck.

To keep it simple, it uses a different type of drill bit that gives the drill more hammer action. Making it ideal for heavy-duty tasks that a standard drill can’t handle.

Like most Black + Decker tools, this SDS hammer drill is aimed at DIYers and not professionals. So how would it tackle the DIY jobs I had lined up? Read on to find out.

Specification

• Motor: 650W
• Impact energy: 1.4J
• Cord length: 2 metres
• Weight: 2.3kg
• Chuck capacity: 2mm-13mm
• Chuck type: SDS+
• Guarantee: 2 years
• Features: 1 x keyed chuck, 8mm SDS-PLUS bit, 1 x 6mm SDS-PLUS bit, 1 x adjustable and removable side handle, Depth stop, 3 x drilling and hammer modes.

First impressions

The unboxing of a power tool is always a highlight for me, but it didn’t take long with this Black & Decker BEHS01 hammer drill. The drill itself sits in the box, no plastic wrap, along with a handle, gauge stop and a small cardboard box containing a drill chuck and SDS+ drill bits. From an environmental perspective (which, in my opinion, matters), there is little packaging to get rid of, and what little there is is 100% recyclable and chlorine-free.

The lack of a hard case or carry case is a minus point. All my other Black & Decker tools have always come with at least a carry bag. I’ve noted that some sellers show the drill with a carry case, but I’ve not seen one that actually comes with one. A shame as I would have liked a hard carry case.

The Black & Decker BEHS01 is weighty, but in SDS drill terms, it is relatively lightweight. It is well-balanced and has a soft-grip handle that holds the drill firmly in the hand. Other notable features are the thick 2m cord (generally means more power), the mode selector that locks into place (I liked that), a reverse switch, and a small mystery button, which I suspected would be a power lock button, but we will find out later. Overall, I liked what I saw.

Set up

A corded drill like the Black & Decker BEHS01, means you don’t have to worry about charging up a battery before you can get started. One less step in the setup process. And, as it comes with a UK plug you can plug it in straight away, hit the trigger, feel the power, and appreciate the noise.

Like most drills, there are three modes on the Black & Decker BEHS01. You’ve got drill, drill and hammer and hammer. You simply need to choose the one most appropriate for the job. The selector is a decent size, and operation is easy. A push button releases the selector and locks it in place when you reach your chosen mode. For me, I liked the added extra peace of mind.

Elsewhere, the keyless chuck is a breeze to use. Pull back the sleeve, insert your bit, and you are ready to go. It's the same process to release it. And let's not forget the side handle included to help steady the drill. This fits behind the chuck and can be placed in your favoured position thanks to the inbuilt notches. A small plastic nut tightens the handle in position, ready for action.

Finally, an interesting addition was the chuck adaptor for use with standard drill bits. I can see that Black + Decker are trying to add value and purpose, but I’ve already got my newly acquired Einhell cordless drill that does what I want so wasn't sure if this was necessary.

It does mean you can get extra power without having to splash out on SDS-friendly drill bits, but it looked awkward, and I just wasn’t sure about it.

Performance

The Black + Decker BEHS01 came with a couple of 6mm and 8mm SDS drill bits, which immediately limited how I could use it. So I invested in this 3-piece Erbauer SDS Plus Shank Chisel Set from Screwfix to test the Black + Decker BEHS01 more thoroughly. This included a 250 mm point chisel and 2 x flat chisels (20 x 250 mm and 40 x 250 mm).

To kick off testing, I decided to use my new chisel bits to break up some large blocks of concrete that I had dug out of the ground a while ago. I originally tried smashing them up with a lump hammer and a cold chisel, but without much success.

The mystery button turned out to be a lock button, which I decided to call into action straightaway. The hammer mode and the smaller chisel did a good job of breaking off chunks. It still took me a good 15 minutes to break up one large piece of concrete, but with no need to worry about swapping batteries, the drill didn’t miss a beat. A return visit a couple of days later got the same results on the remaining blocks.

Next, it was time to try the supplied drill bits. First up was drilling into concrete, which it handled with ease. Next, it was drilling into exterior brickwork for hooks, an absolute breeze. Then it was indoors to drill into walls in order to put up some shelf brackets; it couldn’t have been easier. All the masonry I tried, the drill powered through.

Next, it was back to the chisels and tile removal. I had two layers of tile on tile to tackle and the first layer came off pretty easily, but the original layer (stuck to the wall) was more challenging. But again, the Black + Decker BEHS01 was up to the task.

The final test was using the keyed chuck with standard drill bits. While it looked and felt awkward, (and I’m not a fan of keyed chucks, especially when I’ve lost the key), it worked fine and gave extra power where needed. In some cases, too much power compared to my trusty cordless drill.

The one issue I had with the Black + Decker BEHS01 was the attachable side handle. It was easy to fit, but no matter how much I tightened it, it still slipped off when tackling tougher tasks. For lighter tasks, I did however get to use the handy depth gauge that slips into the handle.

Who shoud buy it?

The Black + Decker BEHS01 is a great choice for DIYers who need extra power for projects that their cordless drill simply can’t handle. It's easy to struggle through using a cordless drill when it doesn’t quite have the power you need, but this isn’t good for your cordless drill and will shorten its working life.

An SDS type of drill is a smart addition for DIYers, and the Black + Decker BEHS01 is an affordable, easy-to-use tool that provides enough power to tackle most home DIY and home renovation projects. All you need to do is fit your chosen SDS bit, choose your mode and hit the power trigger.

Final verdict

I’d definitely recommend the Black & Decker BEHS01 to any DIYer who likes tackling lightweight demolition and drilling masonry jobs, and needs a bit more power than their favourite cordless drill offers. This is a great starting point for anyone who doesn’t own an SDS drill, or an occasional DIYer who wants to replace an old, worn-out drill.

The addition of the keyed chuck seems like an odd choice, but it works and lets your SDS drill double as an everyday drill that uses standard drill bits. Personally, I prefer to use my Einhell cordless drill for standard drilling and an SDS drill when a project calls for the extra power.

I would have liked to see at least a couple of chisel bits and a carry bag or hard case included, especially as it is aimed at DIYers. I think this would have made it the complete package. However, these are small points as you are getting an affordable SDS drill that will get stuff done, in fact, almost anything a DIYer will tackle.

If you had told me last year that a corded vacuum cleaner would be my favourite model, I wouldn’t have believed you. As someone with zero arm strength and two flights of stairs, I had remained as loyal as ever to my cordless vacuum – until I met the Henry Allergy (available on Amazon).

Yes, it’s a little bulky, weighing 7.7kg, but its powerful suction and reliable performance outweigh this drawback every time, making it one of the best vaccum cleaners. Thanks to the two-metre hose, I can vacuum half of my stairs from the top and half from the bottom without having to lug the body up and down with me.

To find out whether the Henry Allergy Vacuum Cleaner could be right for you, keep reading – I’ve shared the good, the bad, and the type of home it’s best suited for below. Plus, I asked an allergy expert whether HEPA filters are all they’re cracked up to be.

Henry Allergy Vacuum Cleaner specs

Here's a round-up of the specs you need to know:

Henry Allergy Vacuum Cleaner: set-up

One thing I love about a Henry vacuum is how simple it is to set-up and use. It might not have 100 flashy features like many cordless models do, but if you just want to get on with your cleaning without solving a technical riddle, it’s just the trick.

Plug it in, switch it on, and you’re good to go. The attachments are pretty self-explanatory – they click on with ease, and the instruction manual clearly explains what each one is best for.

Henry Allergy Vacuum Cleaner: ease of use

Whether you have carpets, hard flooring, or want to dust off fabric sofas, this vacuum works wonders on all types of surfaces and comes with all the attachments you need for each one, so you don’t cause any damage.

I’ve tested it on all three, and while it works fantastically on each of them, it definitely scored top marks on my hard wooden flooring – it glides across like a dream, without missing a speck of debris. I love finishing off skirting boards and cabinet tops with the crevice tool.

From crumbs and dirt to hair and food clumps, nothing gets past the powerful suction of this vacuum. Due to this high grip power, you do have to put in a bit of effort when it comes to cleaning carpets – but rest assured, the results are always worth it.

I previously mentioned that this vacuum is a little bulky, so when I discovered that it comes with a handy built-in stand to rest the hose, I couldn’t have been more excited. This, combined with the handle on top, makes it easier to carry around.

Talking of useful features, the Henry Allergy Vacuum Cleaner also comes with its classic cord rewind feature, making it easy to store away.

Cleaning out my vacuum is one of my least favourite chores, but thankfully, due to its six-litre capacity, I only need to do this around once a month. The vacuum bags are cheaper than I expected too, costing under £15 on Amazon for 10 dust bags.

Despite other vacuum cleaners claiming to have a 'tangle-free' design, I always ended up cutting my hair out of the vacuum head with a pair of scissors, which was so frustrating. To my delight, I haven’t had to do this with the Henry Allergy – only once did I just have to brush it into the suction. So, if you have pets or shed a lot of hair yourself, I highly recommend it.

Henry Allergy Vacuum Cleaner: HEPA filter

The HEPA filter is, of course, the standout feature of this vacuum cleaner, making it a great choice for those with allergies and pets (or anyone looking to improve their indoor air quality).

As a hayfever sufferer, running this around the house in the summer gives me peace of mind that pollen isn’t collecting on surfaces and aggravating my allergies even further at home.

I was initially sceptical that a HEPA filter would make that much of a difference, but after speaking with Dr Stephanie Kayode, Allergy Physician at Allergy Care London, I changed my mind.

"HEPA filters are made up of multiple small, crisscrossing fibre layers that are great at trapping and collecting the smallest particles," she explains. "In non-HEPA vacuums, these tiny particles can escape the filters, travelling out of the vacuum and back into the home."

"It has been demonstrated that HEPA filter vacuums, when used over time, are better at retrieving dust, pollen and animal allergens than non-HEPA vacuums. Over the long term, vacuuming removes allergens and debris from carpets and soft furnishings. HEPA-filter vacuums can successfully reduce airborne allergen levels."

Henry Allergy Vaccum Cleaner: final verdict

Henry vacuums are a classic for a reason – they're long-lasting, reliable, and offer high suction without unnecessary faff. The Allergy model is no exception, and after a year of testing it on all kinds of surfaces (hard flooring, carpets and furniture), it has always delivered flawless results.

Although this model is marketed towards those with allergies, I think all households are better off having a HEPA vacuum. While the standard model is a little cheaper, for the sake of a £20 difference, you may as well opt for the higher-grade filter.

It might be clunkier than some of the cordless models out there, and it is a bit of a pain that you have to buy filters separately, but this is the vacuum I’ll always turn to when I need a deep, thorough clean. And, if the other Henrys I’ve tested in the past are anything to go by, I know it’s going to last me a very long time.

If you're feeling undecided, read our Henry HVR160 review – a popular choice for DIYers. Or, for low-maintenance robot cleaning, check out our review of the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete.

I’ll admit it, I initially had my doubts about the MeacoFan Sefte 6" Portable Air Circulator. After all, how much power could a six-inch fan really deliver? However, it’s safe to say that after testing it for over a week, I’ve completely changed my mind.

I’ve recently been using the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Air Circulator, which I’m absolutely obsessed with, so this smaller version had a lot to live up to if it was going to replace my current setup.

To find out whether this is one of the best cooling fans on the market – including how well it performed, how easy it is to use, and how it compares to its bigger sister – read my honest review below.

MeacoFan Sefte 6" Portable Air Circulator: specs

MeacoFan Sefte 6" Portable Air Circulator: first impressions and set-up

The fan arrived in a cardboard box and was well-protected with paper pulp as well as a reusable storage bag, which will come in handy over the winter when it is not in use.

The device came with everything I needed to get started: a charging cable, an instruction manual, a battery for the fan, and the remote. I put the battery in, placed it on charge, and within a few hours it was good to go. I barely needed to read the instructions as it was all pretty self-explanatory.

As someone who constantly loses chargers, I would have preferred a USB-C port. However, I am impressed that the battery is replaceable, making it more eco-friendly and longer-lasting than other cheaper models I’ve seen.

I was pleasantly surprised at how lightweight the fan was, weighing just 1.7 kg with a built-in handle for easy transportation. I can even carry it with just two fingers. As for the design, its simple black and white colours blend in nicely with my bedroom.

How the MeacoFan Sefte 6 Portable Air Circulator performed

The good

Like I mentioned, I was skeptical that this tiny fan would be able to deliver any impressive results, but to my surprise, its powerful cooling reaches 16 metres – that’s roughly the size of a lorry for scale! It also offers up to 70° vertical and horizontal oscillation to ensure the whole room is cooled evenly.

There are 12 different speeds to choose from, which can be controlled either manually on the device or via the remote control – which, by the way, magnetically attaches to the fan so you never lose it (genius!) It also glows in the dark, which I found very cool.

The fan has three different modes: Eco, Normal, and Night. The latter is a game-changer for light sleepers, turning off the LED display to ensure your sleep remains undisturbed.

Measuring just 32.4 x 21.0 x 18.0 cm, I’ll be packing this fan for summer UK staycations when I’m unsure whether the hotel will have air conditioning or adequate cooling. Plus, my car’s air conditioning is currently broken, so I can easily put this on the passenger seat if a heatwave strikes.

The bad

One thing I was a little disappointed in was the noise. Meaco says the levels are as low as 22 decibels, which, for reference, is slightly louder than a whisper. However, from about speed level three onwards, the noise can become a little distracting and sounds like it's rattling. The rattling noise increases when it's set to horizontal oscillation – even when I placed it on various surfaces.

Perhaps my expectations for noise were just too high, given that it’s a smaller device...

MeacoFan Sefte 6" vs MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Air Circulator

Final thoughts

All in all, I was really impressed with this latest offering from Meaco. It might not be the cheapest mini fan out there, but even the fact that the battery is replaceable shows me that it’s going to last a long time, rather than something you chuck out after a few years when it breaks.

If the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Table Air Circulator is out of your price range, having tested both, I can confirm that there isn’t a huge difference between the two. Obviously, the 10" has more power and a greater range, but you can get away with this smaller version if you need to and save a bit of money.

It’s lightweight, simple to use, and does a fantastic job of cooling me down – whether I’m working at my desk, trying to sleep, or baking in the kitchen. I love the fact that I can carry it around from room to room without it being a faff, and the long-lasting battery life and short charging time are a great bonus.

You may also want to read our review of the Dyson Pure Cool Activated Carbon Fan and Air Purifier, which helped our former news editor with his allergies. Or, for something with a little more oomph, read our round-up of the best portable air conditioners.

I've never tried an all-in-one vacuum mop before, so I tested the Beldray All-in-One Multi-Surface Floor Cleaner to see just what all the fuss was about. Positioned as a one-stop-solution for busy homes where dirt and spills on flooring are a regular occurrence, it's designed to do the job of two machines in one.

While my children are no longer young, they are still more than capable of dropping food and spilling liquids. Add into the mix a small dog, and my own somewhat clumsy nature, and it seems it would be the perfect fit.

The only downside as far as I could see prior to testing was that I'm short on storage space for it to live in, as I own a relatively small flat. Nonetheless, I put it to the test to see if it was something I'd find the space for if it was that good.

Specifications

The Beldray All-In-One Floor Cleaner has the following spec:

• Colour: Black
• Type: Wet and Dry
• Cordless: Yes
• HEPA Filter: No
• Maximum Runtime: 25 mins
• Power: 180W
• Speed Settings: 1
• Capacity: 0.65 Litres
• Dimensions: 25.2 x 28 x 108.85 cm

First impressions

The Beldray All-in-One Multi-Surface Floor Cleaner arrived in a large brown box. It wasn't particularly heavy and I was able to carry it upstairs to my flat alone. Unboxing it revealed a similarly sized box inside, branded with the product images and text describing its key features.

Opening it wasn't difficult, and it was well packaged inside to prevent damage during transit. Once unpacked, it was already pre-assembled other than the handle. The clean and dirty water containers were already in place, but as it didn't arrive fully charged, I had to assemble it and plug it in for the recommended 5.5 hours before I was able to use it.

Luckily I had assumed this might be the case, so had allocated time to do the initial set-up and test across two days. I'd also timed it to coincide with the need to clean my home, so was hoping I would be able to see exactly what it was capable of from the off.

The instruction manual was clear and easy-to-follow (and is also available online via the Beldray website if you ever lose it), so once the handle was inserted, I placed it on the base tray, plugged it in and left it to charge. A blue indicator on the front of the cleaner shows when it's charging, which makes it easier to know when it's ready for use.

During operation, these lines turn to green.

Using the Beldray All-in-One Multi-Surface Floor Cleaner

Before using the Beldray All-in-One Multi-Surface Floor Cleaner for the first time, you need to remove the clean water dispenser and fill it with water. The instructions advise that you can also add some mild detergent in for extra cleaning power. Unlike the Philips OneUP 5000 Series Electric Mop, which I had previously tested and comes with its own supply of cleaning solution, there is none provided with the Beldray cleaner, or details provided of any recommended ones.

I therefore decided to add a small amount of multi-purpose cleaner into the water so that I wasn't cleaning the floor purely with water.

To remove the water container, you have to press down on it and then pull it away from the main unit. It took a couple of attempts to get the right action, but once I'd mastered it, it was relatively easy. You then fill the container, pop it back on, and push into place.

Trying out the cleaner on different surfaces

The Beldray cleaner is designed for use on hard floors such as LVT, engineered wood flooring, tiles and vinyl flooring, rather than carpeted areas. I have LVT in my kitchen, living room and tiny utility room, tiled floors in the main bathroom and en-suite and then engineered wood flooring on the staircase leading from the front door to my flat which gave me a good variety of surfaces on which to try the cleaner.

As the instructions state the cleaner is not designed to pick up larger debris, I did vacuum the floors a couple of days before as they were needed a thorough clean. However, there was still plenty of daily debris and dust, and as the floors hadn't been mopped for a week, I was anticipating that there would be a decent level of dirt that needed lifting.

1. Cleaning the tiled bathroom floors

First up was the tiled floors in the bathroom. These had some general dust and a few sticky spots from spilled toiletries. The Beldray All-In-One Multi-Purpose Floor Cleaner dealt with these smoothly and the floor was soon sparkling. And, unlike having to tiptoe over a wet floor after using a standard mop, the floor was almost dry by the time I'd finished.

2. Using the cleaner on LVT flooring

My open plan kitchen diner living room floor has to deal with everything in one go. Cooking, eating, relaxing, snacking, dog zoomies and even the odd football being bounced around when they boys think they can get away with it.

As it's the only living space we have, if there's spills and sticky spots in the kitchen, they need to be removed pretty quickly so that they don't track over to the seating areas. A floor cleaner such as this one kept close to hand could be a great solution to stop me having to tell the boys not to step in certain spots until I can get the mop out.

Much the same as using it on the tiled floors, the Beldray All-In-One Multi-Purpose Floor Cleaner glided over the floor quickly and easily. Spots on the kitchen floor lifted and underneath the dining table the crumbs and marks were gone.

The only downside? I love the fact my Shark Anti Hair Wrap & Flexology Cordless Vacuum Cleaner is flexible enough to lower and slide underneath the sofas easily. The Beldray All-In-One Multi-Purpose Floor Cleaner doesn't have the same feature and so if I wanted to give the whole floor a clean I'd have to move the furniture.

Not necessarily a deal-breaker as the cleaner feels more like a daily life product than one for a full spring-clean.

3. Tackling the engineered wood flooring

Although the Beldray All-In-One Multi-Purpose Floor Cleaner doesn't come with any attachments that would make it slightly easier to use on stairs, I wanted to try it on as many hard surfaces as possible. The entrance stairwell has engineered wood flooring so I worked my way up and down each step to see how the cleaner performed.

There's a small flat section at the top and bottom of the stairs that's mainly inlaid with a doormat, but the area as you come in through the front door gets particularly dirty. Once again, no complaints with how the cleaner lifted the existing dirt and debris. Full marks again in terms of performance, but again, further confirmation that in terms of design and getting the most out of it, this is a cleaner best used on large flat spaces.

Dismantling and cleaning the cleaner

When you've finished using the Beldray All-In-One Multi-Purpose Floor Cleaner, you need to then clean the brush that sits in the base and essentially does all the dirty work.

However, there's the added bonus of a self-clean function that removes some of the hassle with this. It's recommended you do this after every use so that the cleaner stays prepped for use.

After emptying the clean and dirty water tanks, you refill the clean one with clean water and place both back in situ. Make sure the cleaner is not plugged into mains power, is sitting on the base tray and then press the self-clean button at the top of the handle.

Once the cleaning cycle has run for around two minutes, follow the instructions to remove the brush head and if it's clean, pop it on the handy slot that's part of the tray and leave it to dry. Then, put it back into position and you're good to go next time.

However, as it's also recommended you clean the foam filter inside the cleaner each time, you may decide to give the brush a final rinse in the sink as well – something that may be sensible if you've been cleaning particularly dirty floors.

Final verdict

Does the Beldray All-In-One Multi-Purpose Floor Cleaner do what it claims? Absolutely. It vacuums, mops and dries far quicker than using a separate vacuum and mop. The motorised turbo head also means it deals with stubborn spots, sticky marks or spills efficiently – saving repeated scrubbing with a mop. Floors are drier in rapid time making them safer to walk on, and avoiding that post-clean soggy foot feeling.

The downsides are limited, but in the interests of a fair review, I'm mentioning the following.

The 25-minute run time was fine for my small apartment, but I wonder if in larger homes it may not cover all of the hard flooring in one go? If you wanted it to hand for unexpected spills, you also may need to charge it on a very regular basis.

As there are no attachments, it's best used on expanses of flooring that have less clutter or items to move. And of course, there's the issue of storage. Unless you had a large cupboard for your cleaning kit or good utility room storage, it's another small appliance you need to store, as while it may replace a mop, I feel you'd still need a vacuum cleaner for larger volumes of dry dirt and debris.

That said, as I said in the headline, had I owned this product 10 years ago when I lived in a larger property and had two younger children and dogs running around, I'm fairly sure it would have been used on a daily basis.

It would have saved countless kitchen roll sheets clogging up my kitchen bins, the vacuum and mop both being dragged out, and bought me back some time to spend doing other things. Would I recommend it to friends with this kind of home and life? Yes. For me, with older children and a smaller property, not so much, but I've enjoyed testing it and imagining what could have been!

Whenever you buy one of the best cordless drills, you’re often also paying for the potential to use the same battery and charger with other tools from the maker’s range. This Makita bundle gets you off to a flying start, giving you the DTD157 impact driver along with the DHP490 combi drill in a two-piece combo kit.

The two tools offer wide-ranging drilling and driving capabilities. With the DHP490 combi drill, you get drill, hammer drill and screwdriver modes, plus two gears, a variable speed trigger and torque up to 65Nm. Meanwhile, the DTD157 impact driver has a hex. 1/4" drive shank and can turn a wide range of machine screws and bolts, with hard impact and soft impact modes ranging up to a mighty 140Nm of torque. Both tools boast a brushless motor and Makita’s famously on-point ergonomics.

In theory, this two-in-one combo should therefore offer the best value for money, and strong performance of both tools. As an experienced DIYer, I put them both through the ropes to see if the investment was worth it.

Where to buy the Makita DLX2539ST 2-Piece Combo Kit LXT

Key specifications

• Cordless tool family: Makita LXT
• Intended uses include: drilling wood, plastic, metal and masonry; driving screws and lugs
• Battery capacity: 5.0Ah (x2)
• Voltage: 18V
• Drill speed: 0 - 500 / 1,900 min⁻¹
• Impact driver torque: 140Nm (max)

What's included

• Makita DHP490 cordless combi drill
• Makita DTD157 impact driver
• 2 x 18V, 5.0Ah lithium-ion batteries
• DC18SD battery charger
• Hard carry case

Both tools included are 18V models from Makita’s LXT range, and they can also be bought individually. The Makita DHP490Z 18V Cordless Brushless Combi Drill costs £68.50 from B&Q as a bare unit without the battery, while the Makita Impact Driver DTD157Z, also from B&Q and again as a bare unit, costs £62.99.

However, buying both tools together as the DLX2539ST kit could represent the best value, as also included in the set are two 18V, 5.0Ah lithium-ion batteries, the Makita Battery Charger LXT DC18SD (which can also charge 14.4V Makita batteries), and a slimline hardcase to store and carry the set.

How I tested

I tested the Makita DLX2539ST 2-Piece Combo Kit LXT by using it for an appropriate selection of DIY tasks, including drilling into brick and installing fixings.

1. Hammer-drilling holes in brick

Among the dozens of cordless combi drills I’ve tested, the Makita DHP490 from this kit is one of the very best at drilling into hard, dense materials like brick and breeze blocks. I’ve used many different models to drill holes in my home’s walls, which are built from very hard brick, and this has proven difficult with some drills. The DHP490 took around 30 seconds to perform the same job that demanded several minutes of struggle with competing models. My only gripe was that the chuck struggled to keep a secure hold of certain narrow drill bits.

You can see the sort of project that’s easily achievable with this drill in my article on how to hang shelves.

2. Driving screws

Both of these tools can drive screws. The DHP490 combi drill performs the task perfectly well, with its choice of 20 torque settings, two gears and the variable speed trigger collectively giving you excellent control over the force applied to the screw.

But it’s the DTD157 impact driver that really excels in this area. With a hex screwdriver bit securely installed in the collar, it turns fastenings with impressive power. I found this tool extremely helpful when working with long or stubborn screws that had proven impossible for me to turn using a screwdriver or combi drill. Just take care not to apply excessive force, as this can strip the drive on a screw – especially if the screw is relatively low-quality.

3. Drilling into wood

This is another job for the DHP490 cordless drill. I found that it worked quickly and powerfully when drilling into test pieces of hardwood and engineered board, boring neat holes with minimal effort. Where holes needed to be especially neat, I used the gear selector to choose the lower rev range for highly controlled drilling.

Ease of use

Even though this power tool kit is aimed at the more experienced end of the DIY market, it’s no more difficult to use than an equivalent set for occasional users or beginners. The controls, such as the direction selectors on both tools, and the mode selection collar on the cordless drill, work fluidly and intuitively. Charging the batteries is as easy as slotting one onto the charger.

If you’re new to using impact drivers, then you might face a slight learning curve with this component of the Makita kit. An impact driver typically has higher torque than a comparable cordless drill, which means drill bits and screws are subjected to stronger force. That’s generally a good thing, but it means you should use high-quality screws and extras such as this Makita E-12011 10 Piece Impact Black Bit Set from Amazon to minimise the risk of these components breaking, or the screws being stripped. In routine use, the DTD157 impact driver is even simpler to use than the DHP490 combi drill.

Battery performance

The Makita DLX2539ST kit never let me down in terms of battery life. Between the two included batteries you have ten amp-hours of work potential, which proved more than enough to get me through a day of DIY. I found that the included charger could recharge one of these hefty batteries within less than two hours, so there’s scope to power one of them back up during a mid-renovation meal break.

As with all lithium-ion batteries, the ones supplied with this kit will noticeably degrade after a number of years (or after sustained heavy use). You’ll maximise their good performance by following good battery maintenance practices, such as keeping the batteries charged to a moderate level and storing them at room temperature.

Who should buy it?

Clearly, this twin-set of tools is most relevant to users who will make good use of an impact driver, as well as a cordless combi drill. If you’re a keen DIYer and you often need to drive large or awkward screws, then using the impact driver will make this easier.

With this Makita bundle, you can work quickly by using the drill to make holes, and the impact driver to install fastenings into them. As there are two batteries included, you won’t even need to switch this component between actions (unless one battery is recharging).

On the other hand, I wouldn’t recommend this kit to casual DIYers who would rarely use the impact driver. If this sounds like you, then you might be better off buying the Makita DHP490SFX2 18V 1 x 3.0Ah Li-Ion LXT Brushless Cordless Combi Drill & Drill Bit Set from Screwfix that comes with the same drill, plus a high quality set of drill bits and other accessories in place of the impact driver.

Final verdict

True to form, Makita has delivered an impressive and capable power tool kit. The combi drill and the impact driver are both excellent tools in their own right, and when used together during complicated DIY projects they can bring a welcome boost in speed and convenience. Battery life and recharging are excellent, and the hard carry case is a smart and practical solution for keeping the set in good and orderly condition.

I have only a few gripes to mention – a drill chuck that’s not ideal for the narrowest drill bits, and a price that will put off some occasional DIYers – but neither is a deal breaker. The Makita DLX2539ST 2-Piece Combo Kit LXT is another powerful piece of evidence that Makita is the ultimate ‘prosumer’ brand for DIYers who are taking their home renovations seriously.

Entrepreneur Jamie Siminoff came up with the idea for Ring after he Googled for doorbells that could connect to a smartphone, found there were none, and decided to build his own.

After Amazon bought Ring for a billion dollars in 2018, Ring has become the most recognisable smart video doorbell brand in the world, with more than 50 products on sale today.

The Ring Battery Doorbell Pro sits near the top of the range: it’s the company’s second most advanced wireless doorbell, with a lot of attention paid to ensuring it’s extremely easy to install (many of these devices require an electrician), including a separate no-drill mount and a lot of hi-tech features. With an RRP of £179.99, (currently reduced to £75.99 as an early Prime Day Deal on Amazon) it’s not cheap, but the head-to-toe view from the crisp camera is about as good as these gizmos get.

Features of the Ring Battery Doorbell Pro

The Ring Battery Video Doorbell Pro offers top-end features such as enhanced HD video and Colour Night Vision, all delivered with typical Ring ease-of-use and customisability.

It’s not the cheapest out there, but if you’re looking for great performance, reliability and an addition to your home security, it’s a good choice, with a great head-to-toe camera offering a view so crystal clear you can see what the postman has delivered.

It delivers alerts to your phone instantly with two-way talk letting you get in touch with couriers before they turn on their heel and take your package back to the depot.

Everything works through Amazon’s simple, clear Ring app, and the barrier to use is very low here, so it’s no issue for less technical people. There’s an HD camera (1536p resolution, to be precise) and a new radar scanner which makes for more accurate alerts, including package-drop alerts (subscription only) even when the courier does not press the alarm bell.

You get real-time notifications every time someone either presses your doorbell or motion is detected. Live View puts you ‘into’ the doorbell in real time, and phone-style buttons let you use Two-Way talk to communicate with whoever’s at the door. There’s also easy-to-use privacy controls (for instance, you can set areas your camera does not monitor, so that you’re not spying on neighbours). There’s also Alexa integration so you can say, ‘Alexa, answer the front door’, or use Alexa to send recorded messages.

The camera is bright and precise, with new low-light settings offering colour images even in the evening, along with adjustments for glare and when the camera is used through glass. The app is no-nonsense and easy to navigate, and responding to an alert takes you directly to a live view where you can interact with couriers, postmen and family members.

Setting up the Ring Battery Doorbell Pro

This is where the Ring really comes into its own. I was replacing an old Nest doorbell that had been installed by an electrician, then a builder had accidentally severed the cable, leaving it useless, so I was very much in the market for something simpler to deal with, and requiring no wiring or expensive tradesmen to get going. This fits the bill.

There’s an online guide to setting up both the Ring itself, accessible via QR code, and the New Ring No-Drill Mount (which comes separately, priced £17.99 on Amazon). I'm no DIY expert (so much so that my wife has very strong feelings on this matter), but I managed to have the Ring doorbell installed and working within 30 minutes (and most of that was removing the previous model).

Pairing it with the app is simple and near-instant, and if you have other Amazon devices (I tested it with a doorbell ringer), it rapidly detects and connects to those, too. You require a separate Ring account, not just your Amazon one, but once that’s set up, it’s plain sailing.

How I tested the Ring Battery Doorbell Pro

I’ve used the Ring for several months in my London terraced home – it is a fairly busy area, so there are lots of people walking past, particularly in the morning and the evening. I also have a fair number of deliveries as a freelancer, so being able to act rapidly to prevent couriers disappearing is extremely useful.

I’ve tested it over the course of multiple months, recharging when necessary and noting the amount of time that has passed, and used it with visitors arriving at my house day and night (as well as keeping an eye on people who pass during the night).

I’ve also tested it both with and without the subscription, to see whether it’s something which really is optional, or if the device is next to useless without paying the monthly fee.

Is the subscription worth it?

The most basic Ring Solo Home subscription (covering one device and purchased from Ring) is £4.99 a month or £49.99 per year, which provides video recording (you can save, review and share from the app) and stored history (up to 180 days). If you have more than one device (such as multiple cameras) you’ll need the Multi subscription which is £7.99 a month. The Ring Battery Pro comes with a 30-day free trial if you’re a new Ring customer.

The subscription is worth it if you’re nervous about security, offering rewindable video of every door interaction through the night. But you can easily live without it, with the camera showing who’s been at your door via the notifications, just minus the capacity to really inspect the people.

The subscription-only ‘Package’ alerts (which detect posted packages even without a ring) are likewise a nice-to-have, rather than an essential.

How I've found using the Ring Battery Doorbell Pro

Positive things first: in audio and video terms, this is a fantastic product. Pictures are clear, the video feed doesn’t stutter, and even at night you can clearly see who’s at your door, in colour. Amazon’s vaunted ‘head to toe’ view is great: you can clearly see not just who’s there, but what they have put through your letterbox (you can’t read the words, but you can see if it’s a letter, package or HMRC brown envelope, for example).

Even with the most skittish couriers, it’s always offered me enough time to communicate that I’d prefer if they left the package in the recycle bin rather than vanishing with it: the speaker’s loud and clear and the app never ‘hangs’ at inopportune moments. If there’s ever a Wi-Fi issue, it reconnects quietly by itself.

One of the selling points of the subscription is getting Package Alerts, which look for packages arriving in a zone you set up, and keep track of deliveries. Quick Replies let you send a message (including in the voices of Ant and Dec, for some reason), but I found the canned responses less useful than the traditional approach of actually speaking to people.

The battery life is pretty decent – but has dropped a little over the eight months I’ve used it, to the point where it now requires charging roughly every three weeks (it comes with an older USB-B cable to charge, and takes around eight hours to do so each time).

I personally found the ‘motion detected’ alerts a little over the top, but I realise not everybody has as many people walking past their door as I do. It’s clever enough that I rarely get alerts for passing cars, for example, and nor does it pick up the children’s playground next to my house. You can curb this by muting motion alerts. When someone actually does press your doorbell, it also looks different, so you never miss a visitor.

For a device you have to take apart and recharge fairly regularly, one downside is that the casing is held in place by a single, tiny screw – inevitably, this went missing, and now the outer plastic casing falls off regularly every time my children slam the door (which is, if you know teenagers, every single time they use it).

Do I rate it? Yes, it's done exactly what it said it would and suits the needs of our home well.

Robot vacuum and mop technology has taken a major leap in recent years, with brands competing on suction power, navigation and automated cleaning systems.

I own a range of models, but the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete Robot Vacuum Cleaner (available from Curry's) is meant to stand out from the crowd with stronger suction, extended mop reach and improved obstacle handling.

I put it through real-world testing to see how it performs in a typical home environment and whether it really stacks up against the best on the market.

Design, specs and key features

The MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete is positioned as a high-end robot vacuum and mop with a focus on deep cleaning and edge coverage.

It features a high suction system rated up to around 28,000Pa, placing it among the strongest on the market and ahead of many competitors in its class. For comparison, models like the eufy Omni C28 (which I also tested) typically sit around 15,000Pa, while Roborock and Ecovacs' flagship units often range between 7,000–12,000Pa.

A key differentiator is its extendable mop arm system, which actively pushes outward during cleaning to reach edges and corners. This is something most circular robot vacuums struggle with due to their fixed round mop footprints.

The Z60 Ultra Roller Complete includes a full self-maintaining docking station handling dust emptying, mop washing, drying and water refilling.

A nice added feature was that it also came with replacement dust bags, mop pads, cleaning solution, filters and rollers, reducing early running costs compared with many rivals where consumables often need replacing within months.

Cleaning performance and real-world testing

I tested the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete on a range of floors and I have to say it delivered strong results, with deep cleaning performance that was noticeably more effective than its competitors.

It handled dust, fine debris, and pet hair effectively, and the mop system provided consistent water distribution without obvious streaking.

However, where it stood out most was edge and corner cleaning. The extendable mop arms allowed it to reach into areas that circular systems typically miss, giving a more complete clean along walls and furniture edges compared with standard robotic mops.

In testing on thick black carpet and hallway transitions, the vacuum demonstrated strong adaptability across different floor types and obstacles. It is capable of climbing thresholds of around 4.5cm, with manufacturer claims suggesting up to 8cm in multi-step configurations, placing it well above many competing robot vacuums.

This makes it particularly effective in homes with mixed flooring and higher doorway transitions, where many circular robot vacuums can struggle or become stuck.

That said, cleaning time could be slow. A single 10m² room on deep clean mode took up to 30 minutes, particularly when the robot was performing repeated scanning passes or re-checking layout data.

Navigation, limitations and usability issues

Despite its strong cleaning ability, navigation is where the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete shows its weaknesses.

In testing, it frequently bumped into objects and occasionally struggled with tight spaces, with wheel entrapment happening more often than expected for a premium model. This is less common in systems such as Roborock Qrevo (available on Amazon) and Ecovacs' Deebot X11 (also on Amazon), which typically use more advanced obstacle avoidance.

It also had a tendency to re-clean areas unnecessarily, even outside of deep clean mode, which increased total cleaning time and reduced efficiency in smaller spaces.

Mapping and scanning were also slow, especially in unfamiliar environments, making initial setup and first runs noticeably longer than rival systems. Battery drain was also significant under high-power or deep clean modes, meaning it performed best in open-plan layouts where it could return to its dock more easily.

Is the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete the best robot vacuum cleaner?

This model delivers strong deep cleaning performance, impressive edge coverage and one of the most complete automation packages currently available on the market.

Its extendable mop system and high suction power give it a clear advantage over circular rivals in detailed cleaning tasks, particularly along edges and hard-to-reach areas.

However, its navigation inconsistencies, occasional object collisions and slow cleaning cycles mean it is not the most efficient option for every home. While it performs best in open-plan spaces where it can operate continuously from its dock, it may feel less refined in cluttered or complex environments.

Overall, the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete Robot Vacuum Cleaner is a powerful cleaning system that competes strongly at the top end of the market, but whether it is the “best” depends on whether you prioritise deep cleaning power over speed and navigation precision.

Found this helpful? You may also want to read our buying guide on the best vacuum cleaners for builder's dust or our review of the Henry HVR160.

A cordless drill is an essential tool for any DIYer, so choosing a good one is important. Invest in a poor choice, and it won’t be long before you’ll be looking at spending again. The latest cordless drill to cross my path is the Einhell TP-CD 18/50, an everyday drill aimed at DIYers.

This is the first time I’ve encountered an Einhell drill, so I was excited to see what it had to offer. As a package, it’s making all the right noises, and it comes in at a very tempting price point.

Would it finally be time to say goodbye to my faithful old Black and Decker cordless drill and let the Einhell take its place? Time to find out.

Buy the Einhell TP-CD 18/50 drill today

Spec and features

• Motor type: Brushless motor
• Torque: 50 Nm
• Gears: 2
• Battery type: Lithium Ion
• Battery voltage: 18v
• Weight: 2.35kg
• Chuck capacity: 2mm-13mm
• Features: LED work light, torque adjustment collar, battery level indicator, 1 x hard carry case, 1 x drill body, 1x battery charger, 2 x 2.0Ah batteries, 1 x belt clip, instruction manual

First impressions

Who doesn’t love a power tool that comes with its own hard case? Any type of case is a winner, as it helps protect a power tool, but the Einhell hard case gives the impression of being a long-term friend to the Einhell drill.

It's a solid plastic case with a bright red lid emblazoned with the brand name. At least it will be easy to find. Inside, it is lined with egg box foam padding (one side) and flat foam padding on the other. This ensures that the drill, batteries and charger aren’t thrown around and damaged when on the move.

The drill body feels sturdy and well-built, and sits neatly in the hand, with the rubberised grip giving a secure feel. The LED light instantly makes an appearance when the trigger sets the drill into life (my battery was charged and ready to go). Can I switch this off? Not sure (yet), but it might be good if I could switch it off when not needed as it would help save battery life.

Setting up

As you might expect, there’s not much work involved in setting up a cordless drill. Slide in the battery and you’re ready to go. The battery was already charged, so it could be used straight out of the box which is a nice touch.

What you do need to do is familiarise yourself with the torque selector and the selector switch. The selector switch lets you choose between driving, drilling and impact drilling (the hammer function).

You will need to combine this with the most suitable torque setting to help ensure you get the best from the Einhell TP-CD 18/50. To add a little more to the mix, there are two gears which help you fine-tune performance. There’s a lot going on, so if you are an inexperienced DIYer, you should read the instruction manual fully before you start.

Performance

The fun part of any review is using the product itself, and a new cordless drill is always going to see plenty of action. To kick off, I thought I’d ease myself into using the Einhell TP-CD 18/50with some simple wood screwing tasks. There are no drill bits or a bit holder included, so I used what I already had. The 13mm chuck is easy to use, but slightly different from other drills I’ve used. But it did what it needed to do, without any problems.

I started with 100mm screws for screwing fence panels into wooden posts. With the screw selector in position and the torque setting set to 11, off I went. This worked as expected, but on tougher parts, I had to turn the torque up to the maximum level to finish.

I struggled with one screw in particular, so I switched over to my old cordless drill to see how it compared. The Einhell TP-CD 18/50 was definitely doing a better job, probably thanks to its extra torque (50 Nm compared with 40 Nm).

Like all good drills, the drill stops when it reaches its managed torque level. This ensures you have more control over the drill and don’t go too deep with a screw, which could split the wood. So start low and turn up the torque until you get the level you want.

Tackling heavy duty DIY drilling tasks

Switching the selector to drill or hammer mode eliminates the need to choose a torque setting, with the Einhell TP-CD 18/50 automatically switching to maximum output. Perfect for the next set of DIY tasks I had in mind.

Next up was drilling into exterior brickwork, and using my spade drill bit to create recesses in a fence post, ready for the concrete screws. The Einhell TP-CD 18/50 zipped through the timber with no problem.

Switching over to my DeWALT masonry drill bits, putting it into second gear, the Einhell TP-CD 18/50 powered into the brickwork with relative ease. At one point, the drill bit did stick, but I simply retightened the chuck and carried on.

Next up was a move indoors to put up some heavy-duty shelf brackets. Drilling into my interior walls has been hard work in the past. But the Einhell TP-CD 18/50 provided all the power I needed to drill deep enough for the Rawl plugs and screws to be inserted.

I also managed to do all the tasks mentioned without having to swap over the battery. So, I decided to keep going on other DIY tasks to get a better idea of battery life. Overall, I have to say I was very happy with the Einhell TP-CD 18/50's performance so far.

Shop these tools to use with a cordless drill

Battery life

Battery life is key for any cordless tool, and the 18V 2.0Ah batteries supplied with the Einhell TP-CD 18/50 didn’t disappoint. The charger features a set of easy-to-understand icons that make it clear what stage the charging is at. Red and green LEDs make sure you don’t get confused.

Charging times using the supplied charger were pretty swift, taking just 40 minutes to reach a full charge and be ready to go. This would be ideal if you only had one battery, but with two batteries on offer, I always had a fully charged battery ready to replace the other when needed.

You might think that quick charging times mean short working times, but this wasn’t the case with the Einhell TP-CD 18/50. A fully charged battery lasted around 45 minutes to an hour. In real terms, that meant I tackled a whole host of DIY jobs over the weekend and didn’t need to replace the battery. And when I did, I had a fully charged battery ready to replace.

A trio of LED lights on the battery can be activated with a quick press of a button to indicate remaining power. Confusingly, the lights were red, rather than green, but I can live with that.

Final verdict

If you’re looking for an everyday drill that can tackle pretty much any DIY task that you can throw at it, then the Einhell TP-CD 18/50 Cordless Brushless Combi Drill is definitely one you need to add to your list. It offers plenty of torque (50Nm) for a standard cordless drill, which sits at the top end of what you usually get at this level.

For less than £100, you get a solid drill, two batteries, a charger, and a hard case, which, in my opinion, makes it good value for money. You might not get any drill or screwdriver bits with it, which would have been nice, but a charger and two batteries more than make up for this. On the plus side, you can choose the bits you need rather than getting a bunch you may never use.

Throw in quick charge times and decent working times, and there’s little that I didn't like about the Einhell TP-CD 18/50. How long it stays as my number one drill, only time will tell.

At first glance, it doesn’t seem there should be much difference between a fan and something like the LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan (available on Amazon).

But after a few days of using it in two very different spaces – my bedroom at night and my office desk during the day – the experience started to feel noticeably different.

The key question, though, is whether that difference actually makes a noticeable improvement when you’re living with it day to day, especially during a heatwave.

LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan vs standard fan

A standard fan works by pushing a concentrated stream of air in one direction. That’s useful if you’re sitting directly in front of it, but it doesn’t really solve the wider issue of a warm or stagnant room.

The LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan takes a different approach. Instead of focusing airflow into one spot, it keeps air moving continuously around the space. With its 3D oscillation system – combining horizontal and vertical movement – this device helps distribute air more evenly throughout the room.

In my bedroom, that means fewer noticeable warm patches overnight. At my desk, it avoids that “hot corner/cold corner” feeling you often get with a typical fan.

LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan noise levels

One of the most noticeable things about the LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan is how quiet it is in use.

Like the MeacoFan Sefte Pro we also tested, this model carries Quiet Mark certification, which is given to products designed to reduce noise without sacrificing performance.

Even when turned up to higher speeds, the LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan avoids the harsh mechanical hum you normally associate with fans.

In the bedroom, that makes overnight use more realistic without distraction. At my desk, it simply blends into the background while I work.

Airflow control and 3D circulation system

The LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan includes 12 speed settings and three airflow modes (Normal, Natural, Sleep), allowing it to be adjusted depending on how intense the heat feels.

The key feature is the 3D circulation system. Rather than pushing air in a straight line, it directs airflow across multiple directions simultaneously providing cooling while also helping to improve indoor air quality.

This helps reduce still air pockets in the room and creates a more consistent overall cooling effect. It also means I don’t need to constantly reposition it between sleep and work setups.

Flexible 2-in-1 design

One of the reasons the LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan works for my setup is that it easily switches between a pedestal fan and a desk fan.

At my office desk, I use it in desk mode for more direct airflow while working, allowing me to improve the ambient temperature. In the bedroom, I switch it to pedestal mode so it can circulate air more broadly while I sleep.

That flexibility makes it easier to use one device across two completely different environments without compromise.

Ambient backlight

The LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan also includes a dimmable ambient backlight with three brightness levels.

It’s not essential for airflow, but it does add a secondary use as a subtle night light or ambient glow in the evening.

A remote control makes it easy to adjust settings without getting up once the unit is positioned, while the timer and sleep mode features make it more practical for overnight use or longer work sessions without requiring constant adjustments.

Final thoughts

Using the LUME Quiet Air Circulator Fan in both my bedroom and office setup has made the difference between “feeling a fan” and actually improving the overall airflow in a room.

It’s not a dramatic change at first, but over time, the consistency and quiet operation make it feel like a more complete approach to cooling during a heatwave.

Want to browse around before making your purchase? Our buying guide on the best cooling fans is a good place to start. Or, read our review on the MeacoFan Sefte Pedestal Air Circulator, praised by our assistant editor for its "whisper-quiet" design.

As the weather gets warmer, we all need a trusty fan to get us through those hot summer nights. Since my bedroom is located in a top-floor loft conversion that gets absolutely baking, I jumped at the chance to test out Meaco's brand-new offering: the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Table Air Circulator (available on Amazon).

What caught my attention most about this new “whisper-quiet” model wasn’t just the fact that it’s completely portable (goodbye, pesky cables!), but also that the battery is rechargeable and replaceable, making it more eco-friendly than others I’ve seen.

To find out whether this fan is as good as the previous non-Pro version we also tested – and whether it was up to the job of cooling my oven-of-a-bedroom despite its compact size – keep reading.

MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Table Air Circulator: specifications

MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Table Air Circulator: first impressions and set-up

Sleek and simple, the Sefte Pro Table Air Circulator exceeded all my expectations when it came to design – its modern appearance blends in perfectly with my white bedroom walls, so I’m happy to leave it out all summer long.

However, thanks to its built-in handle, lightweight build, and compact size – measuring just 432 x 305 x 227 mm – it would be easy enough to tuck away in a cupboard if you’d prefer it out of sight.

The fan comes with an instruction manual that’s pretty simple to follow, though it did take me a while to work out how to remove the battery lid. The device also comes with a charging cable and remote control, which I was very excited to later discover is glow-in-the-dark and magnetically connects to the fan! My only negative is that I wish the charger was USB-C, as I’m forever losing cables.

On the subject of charging, it only takes 3.5 hours to reach 100% battery, which delivers an impressive 40 hours of use – keeping my house cool all day long.

How the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Table Air Circulator performed

The Sefte Pro series comes in two models: pedestal and table. I opted for the latter because it’s easier to carry from room to room, while the cordless design means I can place it anywhere in my home with ease.

Since the battery is replaceable, the device should last much longer than many of its competitors, which is good news for both the planet and my bank account. You can still operate the fan while it’s charging, so even if the battery runs flat, you won’t be left sweltering without it.

I hate any sort of noise when I’m trying to sleep, so I always dreaded using my old fan whenever summer rolled around. Even with earplugs in, I could always hear the hum, and it drove me nuts. So, when I tested the MeacoFan Sefte Pro, I was pleasantly surprised that I couldn't hear anything. Even without earplugs, my partner confirmed that it makes “very little noise” and “certainly doesn’t stop me from sleeping.”

As someone who gets cold during the night, I was also pleased to see that it comes with a remote control, saving me from having to switch it off manually and fully waking myself up at 4am. The remote can control the speed, oscillation (both vertical and horizontal), timer, pause function, and more. These settings can also be adjusted via the mobile app.

This thoughtfully designed fan also features a night mode, which turns off the LCD display and mutes the beeps so your sleep remains undisturbed – something more appliance brands should take on board.

It offers 12 speeds and can project airflow up to 32 metres – roughly the length of a Boeing 737. It also oscillates from 30° to 120° horizontally and 20° to 65° vertically. If you want the room to feel cool and crisp for your arrival home, you can set auto start and stop timers anywhere between one and 12 hours.

Final thoughts

Suitable for sleeping, working, or chilling around the house, the portable and whisper-quiet design of this fan makes it an excellent all-rounder for wherever you want to use it. It's the best cooling fan I've ever tested and I've been raving about it to my friends and family.

While I have seen rechargeable fans with a lower price tag (like this one from Dunelm for £36), I haven’t seen any with such long battery life, as much oscillation, app control, or a replaceable battery. However, it all depends on whether these features are important to you or if you simply want something affordable that gets the job done.

For me personally, I’d rather invest in something a little more expensive that I know is going to last – and I love the fact that I can pack it with me on UK holidays if my hotel doesn’t have air conditioning.

Spring is when most households start cleaning up their homes ready for summer – but there is one job I tend to strongly dislike, and that is pressure washing.

I've found it often difficult to find all the parts when you first get it out of the garage, before ending up being a job that takes all day, leaves you soaking wet and filthy dirty.

So when I was offered the chance to try a fancy new pressure washer from Kärcher that claimed to be "comfortable", I must admit I was suspicious about whether it really could make this particular task less nasty.

The Kärcher K5 Comfort Premium, which was launched in January, certainly looked smart from all the promotional material online. With its black and yellow ergonomic look, five-year warranty and 145 bar of pressure, it seemed to have an edge compared to some of other best pressure washers in a similar high-end price bracket.

Unboxing

The box the pressure washer came in was substantial, but despite being heavy, I was able to move it myself from where the delivery man left it, using the plastic straps.

The bright, yellow design was smart and immediately identifiable as holding a Kärcher pressure washer. This was great in terms of visual appeal, but worth noting to be aware of perhaps not leaving a newly-delivered box unattended outside a property in any crime-prone areas. You wouldn't want your expensive new machine being stolen before having the chance to even use it.

When it came to unboxing, this was straightforward and I was especially impressed that there was very little plastic inside, just one sheet, plus the straps to hold the box together on the exterior. The pressure washer was thoughtfully cushioned with cardboard to avoid any damage in transit instead, with all the different parts wedged together so they didn't move around too much. The instruction manual was on top, and easy to find on opening.

Ease of setting up

The Kärcher K5 Comfort Premium came with an instruction manual that was reasonably easy-to-follow from the diagrams, although it was a little unclear which part of the pressure washer to start constructing first, possibly because it didn't actually matter in what order it was put together. This took around 30 minutes.

Overall I found the assembly straight forward, with the only slightly fiddly bit being affixing the hose to the trigger gun, which is designed to be removable for storage. I didn't fully understand the need for the yellow pouch on the front, but suspect this might be to do with storing additional features that can be purchased.

I was liked the way the universal cleaner slotted straight into the machine ready for automatic dispersal through a specific setting on the rotating nozzle on the lance. I was looking forward to giving this a go.

First impressions

Once the Kärcher K5 Comfort Premium was fully constructed, I gave it a good look over before putting it to the test by cleaning my very dirty patio. It didn't fail to impress, being just as slick in person compared to how it looked online.

The build-quality was excellent – made from 25% recycled materials – with no sign of any flimsy parts, or anything that looked weak enough to break. The fixings were well oiled, and all the buttons had a nice firm feel to them as they were pressed. One thing to watch was the grey trigger on the lance did catch my skin once, which nipped a bit.

The product has been well thought out in its design. The grey hose can be removed from the trigger gun (although this took some fiddling around with to work out how), with a reel for tidying it away when not in use. Meanwhile, the lance itself could be broken down into two sections with two holders on the front to slot them into when packed away.

My only slight surprise was how heavy the machine was at 13.8kg, making it rather cumbersome to lift over the gravel and steps in my garden, without bashing it into things accidentally. The handle on the top was useful for lifting, and any flat surfaces were easy to tackle as the K5 had a decent pair of wheels, and the ability to extend the handle to pull it or push it along.

Ease of use

I had a very dirty patio to test the Kärcher K5 Comfort Premium on, but this pressure washer is suitable for all sorts of things, from cleaning decking, removing weeds from a patio or even washing your car on a lower setting.

You generally aren't advised to use pressure washers on some patios, due to the chance of too much force blowing any crumbling mortar or grout away, or even causing damage to the slabs themselves. However, we only laid this patio last year and it was a robust limestone, so I was fairly confident that the grout and slabs were in good shape.

Despite the slabs being fairly newly-laid, I was surprised by just how dirty they had become over winter, which was in part because we have lots of trees overhanging it, it is fairly low lying, and we have lots of animals unleashing their business on it (the dachshund and chickens being the worst offenders).

Wheeling out the Kärcher K5 for the pressure washing

I used an outdoor plug socket to plug in the K5, and was relieved to find that the cable had enough length (five metres) to not need a series of extension leads, as I have found with cheaper models in the past. The cable tidy on the machine was also well designed, enough to be able to undo just enough length for what I needed, rather than having to pull the whole lot off. This made it much easier to use.

I struggled to attach the trigger gun to the grey hose until I turned the electric supply off, which I don't know if that was a safety feature, or just me failing to put it together. I then connected my yellow garden hose water supply to the black hose pipe connector on the machine and turned the tap on. This is where I have ended up making myself soaking wet with cheap pressure washers in the past, and was thrilled to see that the connection held perfectly with the K5 Comfort Premium. My garden hose didn't ping off, or come loose to squirt water in my face.

Making a start on washing the patio

Finally, I was ready to give the pressure washer a go on the dirty patio.

I started with the lowest pressure washer setting – the "reduced pressure flat jet", selected by turning the nozzle on the end of the lance. This wetted the patio but didn't really cut through the grime, not the fault of the pressure washer I might add, but it did show just how tough the dirt on the patio was going to be to remove.

Next, I gave the "rotary nozzle" a go, which is like a circle of water and I guess the best setting to use when you have a patio cleaning accessory brush attached, that can be purchased separately. This was a little more powerful than the previous setting, but again not quite powerful enough to lift the sludge and algae off.

Deploying the detergent

The next symbol on the nozzle had bubbles on it and was the detergent setting. After twisting it to the bubbles and hitting the trigger, the product automatically flowed out in a flat jet that wasn't too powerful, or too gentle.

This enabled me to easily and quickly cover the already wet patio slabs with the universal detergent, which I could tell worked well as you could smell the detergent.

It's worth noting that this universal detergent is included with the K5 Comfort Premium, but you can also buy specific detergents that fix to the pressure washer for stone, wood, and cars.

Using the high pressure setting

When I finally got to it, the high-power setting really was a beast, pumping out an impressive 145 bar of pressure in a flat jet, and whipping any dirt, algae and other nasties right off the stone. The grime came off quickly too, leaving a clear line between the cleaned and uncleaned areas. Afterwards, I switched to a lower pressure setting to wash the dirty water off the slabs and finish the job.

The hose pipe connector on the pressure washer held firm throughout, and I didn't get squirted in the face with water once throughout the job, which was a win.

I did have a bit of difficulty when I fully uncoiled the grey pressure washer hose from the reel, as it was a little stiff, making it tricky to straighten out. This meant it did tangle with my yellow garden hose water supply a little. That said, I have yet to find a pressure washer that doesn't do this. Importantly, the hose was very robust and well-made with a rubber-like texture, and therefore unlikely to ever split with normal use.

Final thoughts

My patio is fairly large, and cleaning it with the K5 Comfort Premium pressure washer was actually very speedy, taking an hour maximum to do the whole thing. It was sparkling clean too, with no damage – plus even the dog decided it was so clean she went off to the grass to do her business there instead.

As someone who does not enjoy pressure washing, I did find it surprisingly satisfying blasting the jet at the patio and making nice clean lines in the dirt as I went. And while you will still get a mild arm ache at holding the lance, I did not get soaking wet and dirty for once (whoop), plus it was easy to pack away afterwards. I gave the K5 unit a clean by spraying it over on a low pressure setting, before reeling up the grey hose, tidying the electric cable away, and wheeling it back to the garage.

It was much faster to clean the patio with the Kärcher K5 Comfort Premium compared to the faffing around with models I've used in the past. This meant the body ache I usually feel was hugely reduced, and I saved far more time in setting it up, carrying out the job and also packing it away.

For me, this absolutely justified how the machine gets its name as the "comfort premium", because getting any pressure washing job done swiftly is a lot more comfortable (both physically and mentally) than spending hours and hours trying to finish the job, and clean yourself up afterwards.

As someone who often wonders about the quality of the air we're breathing in – primarily down to the fact we live on a busy high street – when I was offered the chance to test the Aranet4 HOME monitor, I was more than happy to give it a try.

While I have a carbon monoxide detector, and use an air purifier in the main living space, I was interested to just how clean my air was, how humidity was affecting my home, and if there were any problems in particular rooms.

Everywhere is single-glazed and the only means of ventilation are opening the windows – which at the front of the property open onto the street – and extractor fans in bathrooms. I dry my washing indoors, and am a frequent dehumidifier user, so it's no surprise I've been wondering what the air in my home is really like.

Buy the Aranet4 HOME monitor today

How the Aranet4 HOME monitor works

The Aranet4 HOME is a small, screen-based indoor air quality monitor that tracks CO₂ temperature, humidity and air pressure in real time.

It provides lab-grade CO₂ measurements using a NDIR (non-dispersive infrared) sensor, and the CO₂ levels are measured in parts per million (ppm). CO2 levels are commonly used as an indicator of ventilation effectiveness, with rising levels generally suggesting insufficient air exchange – or in other words, stale air being present.

While it's impossible for no C02 to be present given it's in the air we breathe out, good home ventilation naturally keeps air flowing, and therefore reduces the amount of CO2 that is present.

According to the makers of the Aranet4 HOME monitor, a well ventilated indoors should register around 400 – 800 ppm. 800 – 1200 ppm indicates moderately raised levels, while anything above 1200ppm would suggest poor and insufficient ventilation.

The reasons levels matter is because breathing poor quality air can have a number of implications. As well as reducing your cognitive abilities (particularly concerning if you have a home office, or a multi-generational household), higher levels can also increase the risk of airborne infections circulating.

In addition to the CO2 readings, temperature readings are taken so you can check if your home is at the recommended levels throughout the year, particularly helpful in winter when the minimum house temperature should be 18°C to help prevent mould and damp.

Humidity levels are taken as this is usually a key concern for homeowners due to high humidity again being associated with related moisture build-up problems. And, the one reading that I didn't realise also contributed so much to your home's health is the atmospheric pressure number.

Imbalances in pressure can impact a number of conditions in your home. In the winter, negative pressure – when the levels inside are lower compared to outside – can lead to cold air and pollutants being drawn inside. This can impact energy bills and could change your air quality.

Positive pressure – when it's higher inside than out – can then push dry air out and pull warm, moist air inside, pushing it into your home or even into cavity walls rising interstitial condensation.

How to read the results

In terms of how you read the results, while the on-screen display is clear and simple to read, the monitor also connects with the Aranet app via bluetooth and also lets you pull up graphs to compare the results over time.

The front of the monitor – or the app screen shows all four readings on a constant basis, and they are updated to a time setting of your choice. Mine updates every 5 minutes.

Subscription free, it's designed to give you clear indicators when air quality drops and ventilation is needed. This is achieved in two ways. Firstly the bar on the monitor display moves between the red, yellow and green strips to show where your CO2 levels sit, but you can also activate a buzzer which will alarm if your levels exceed 1400 ppm. This can also be adjusted to a lower amount via the app.

The constant humidity display is particularly handy during the winter months when you might be wondering if you need to partake in some house burping in order to prevent condensation and mould building up in your home. Or, if like me, you have more moisture than normal due to drying clothes indoors.

And, if you don't have a smart thermostat installed, the temperature function will identify if your house is getting too hot or too cold, potentially helping you to be more energy-efficient as a result.

Atmospheric pressure, is also clear and can again be seen in an easy-to-read graph, which, like the other figures, can be set to show daily, weekly or custom date readings.

Setting up the Aranet4 HOME monitor

The Aranet4 HOME arrived in small box, and at first glance was pretty unassuming. It looked more industrial in appearance than I was expecting, but given its compact size – 70 x 70 x 24mm and only 104g in weight – it's discreet enough that you wouldn't really notice if it was on display. Plus, as it can also be wall-mounted, it could also be located somewhere that wasn't in full view.

Once opened, a guide is inside with a QR code that when scanned leads you to the set-up instructions. All that you physically need to do is remove the stickers on the front of the monitor and add batteries to the rear. These are provided, but even replacing them when they run out won't be expensive as they are standard AA batteries. I don't know about you, but I always have some floating around in my kitchen drawers, and often stock up on bulk packs such as this pack of 40 AA Amazon Basic alkaline batteries as my sons always seem to need them for gaming controllers.

Once the batteries were in, I scanned the QR code which led me to this clear, simple guidance regarding the next steps. It was an easily scrollable PDF on mobile (also available via the website) which explained what the display showed, how to configure settings on the monitor if you didn't want to connect via the app, or how to get the app to connect your monitor using bluetooth.

Set-up, including pairing to the app took around 6 minutes in total, which meant that from unboxing to getting real-time results took less than 10 minutes. Not bad for a piece of kit that could be boosting the well-being of my family, and the health of my home.

How I've tested the Aranet4 HOME monitor

One of the things I've liked the most about testing the Aranet4 HOME monitor is just how easy it is to move it around my home. I've used it in my bedroom, my ensuite bathroom, my son's bedroom and the main open plan kitchen, dining and living room area in order to see how each room differs from the other.

In each room, I've placed it on a shelf or unit where I can easily see it, but it's the app I've checked the most when I want to see just what's going on with the air. And, while I'm only monitoring the results of one Aranet4 HOME monitor, you can add more to your network, name them using the room where they are located, and then toggle through each different set of readings. Something that could be handy in a larger home, or if you want to keep an eye on your basement ventilation for example.

What results have I seen to date?

The temperature in my home is less of a concern for me as despite the single glazing, using the window shutter tip that's helped me stay warm in winter and cooler in summer means we're never really cold. I've set my Hive smart thermostat to manage heat output through the day, and using the Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater tops up a room if I don't need to boost all of the radiators. Then, last summer, when it got particularly hot, the Meaco Fan 10" Sefte Pedestal Air Circulator helped keep me cool.

So, when reviewing the Aranet4 HOME monitor, I've been more interested in the CO2 levels and humidity, although the atmospheric pressure reading shows imbalances that I need to keep an eye on as well. Ideally as it should match the outdoor level, the line needs to be more consistent than it currently is.

1. CO2 levels and readings

While the buzzer has never gone off on the Aranet4 HOME monitor to indicate the CO2 levels are above 1400ppm in a room, it has crept into the mid, and even high range more times than I thought it would.

I've only noticed this on the monitor screen once as I don't spend my whole day looking at it. But, the appeal of this monitor for me is the fact it I can check everything on an app when I want to.

While I've not spotted any obvious patterns yet in terms of why the CO2 rises sometimes, I suspect over time I may as I continue to trial it around my home. As I've only got one monitor, I have had to note the times and dates when it is moved into a different room to try and establish where the problem may be, but for the purposes of reviewing the product that's fine. If I was considering them on a permanent basis, more monitors named to each room would certainly be a more sensible solution.

As we're moving into the warmer weather with windows being opened more frequently, I would hope to see less yellow and more green readings on the graph results but only time will tell.

2. Humidity levels

Overall, given the weather continues to be changeable and I continue to dry washing indoors as I have no outdoor space, I'm pleased with the humidity levels in the property. Most experts say that normal humidity levels in a house should be in the 40-60% range and so far, the monitor has only registered one day when it exceeded those numbers.

While I already use the DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifer to help dry laundry, I also have the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier in my bedroom and it's made me question whether I should maybe still be using this a little more to prevent any condensation until the warmer weather has fully arrived as it's only in bedrooms we are still noticing the odd appearance of window condensation.

As I have sash windows, I don't have trickle vents that could help with some natural air flow to avoid this. So for now, it's back to some house burping and a few more dehumidifier sessions to keep the air cool and fresh.

Final verdict

So, has the Aranet4 HOME monitor made me feel more comfortable about the air in my home? Overall, the answer would certainly be yes. It's raised a few questions regarding CO2 levels, but given I live in an older, listed property on a high street I'm not surprised that the air isn't as clean and fresh as it could be in a new home, where building regulation rules around ventilation would alleviate these issues.

The humidity readings have reassured me that I'm managing this fairly effectively, but that there's always room for improvement. It's easy to assume that once winter is over you don't need to worry, but I think I do need to pay more attention while the weather is still so unpredictable. And, as mentioned, the atmospheric pressure has made me realise just how much there is to keep an eye on with home air quality.

In terms of the negatives, I'd say the first is that the appearance of the monitor is less appealing than it could be for a product that's meant for a home. What's perhaps more frustrating is that there is a solution in the form of a sticker set that can be applied to the front of the monitor. They have space so that the display is clear, but cover the internal workings. But, the problem is they aren't yet available in the UK.

And then of course there's the price. It's not cheap, and a quick internet search pulls up considerably lower priced alternatives such as this Air Quality Monitor from Amazon that appears to do much the same job. That said, without investigating it or testing it, it's impossible to compare.

However, the Aranet4 HOME monitor has been developed alongside a range of professional products designed for the workplace and far bigger settings than a home. It's this expertise that has been used on the home products that make me more confident it's reading the air to a higher standard than other options. Plus, with a range of additional sensors available, it would be easy to create a whole home system to give you total control over your home.

If I'd invested in a hefty home renovation of an older property, adding these throughout the home would probably be an investment I'd consider. Monitoring the results could help give advance warning if there were problems with excess moisture from damp for example. If a building survey had noted radon below ground, you could also add a radon monitor to check if levels were problematic.

Would I buy one for a brand new home? It's unlikely unless I started to have concerns that the levels of ventilation weren't up to standard, but, it's good to know that high-level monitoring is available for a residential setting if needed.

And, if I was to buy them, I'd certainly want stickers to make them look that little bit more aesthetic.

I've seen a rise in the trend of robot vacuums, and I wanted to test the next generation and give a robot mop and vacuum a go to see if they're worth the hype.

I got the newly released eufy Omni C28 to test the latest model of robot mops and I tested it out to see how it performed on every type of flooring in my house.

I reveal the results below and give my opinion on whether it's worth the cost and clarify some misconceptions that I and maybe you have had about them.

How the robot mop was tested

I decided to try the eufy Omni C28 on every type of flooring in my house to see how it performs on each one.

This focused on wooden flooring in my lounge, limestone tiles in my kitchen, the carpet in the living room and the terracotta tiles in the drawing room.

With each of these, I wanted to test the Omni C28 on its most powerful function on the 'Deep' cleaning function, the 'High' water level and the 'Max' suction power. I also used the same washing-up liquid.

I also tried some other tests to really put it through its paces, and I can reveal the results for each flooring type.

Alongside the cleaning performance, I was also interested in how the robot handled navigation and maintenance. The C28 uses iPath 2.0 navigation, which maps the room layout and helps it avoid obstacles, even in darker areas or under furniture.

Testing the robot on wooden floors

The lounge uses basic wooden flooring, which was a good starting ground to test the eufy Omni C28.

With the mapping feature, it was able to assess the room size, surface type and where it could, and couldn't clean.

With the vacuum at the front and the mop behind it, the robot first pulled up dust and debris before mopping. The roller mop system – which applies around 1kg of downward pressure while cleaning – continuously washes itself as it goes, meaning it’s not just pushing dirty water around the floor.

This was a surprise as, despite its size, it performed well compared to my larger Dyson vacuum to give a very good finish. Dare I say, I couldn't have done it better myself.

Testing the robot on limestone tiles

I wanted to give a significantly tougher test, so I took it to the kitchen next. This Italian tumbled limestone flooring proved much tougher to clean for the eufy Omni C28.

Due to the bumpy surface, some stains were tougher to clean than others and this room definitely needed a couple of goes to achieve a full clean. However, I did deliberately leave some trickier stains.

On the first run the vinegar was spread slightly and the beetroot stain only partially lifted. However, the self-cleaning roller mop kept washing itself during the process, which meant the second cleaning pass was far more effective. After another run, both stains were removed.

This is where the automation really helped. Since the robot can return to its docking station to wash the mop, refill water and empty dust automatically, it’s designed to clean areas multiple times without you needing to intervene.

Testing the C28 on terracotta tiles

sq ftIt should be pointed out that after cleaning both the lounge and kitchen, the eufy Omni C28 did need to clean itself and reload its water. This was after 300 sqft of cleaning.

The next room was the largest of the lot, with the drawing room and an adjacent connecting room giving the C28 a workout. These open-plan style rooms are really where robot vacuums/mops come in handy.

The result in this room was the best yet with the flat surface glimmering by the end, and even though I set the function to the highest water level, it was a real bonus that the floor was not too wet, meaning it dried almost instantly, a problem I often get when mopping.

If I was being really picky some water marks were left behind but that is me being very harsh.

Testing the robot on carpet

,Finally, I moved the robot onto the living room carpet, which is a thick, deep-pile carpet and therefore a good test.

This is where the 15,000 Pa suction power came into its own. The robot automatically recognised the change in flooring and lifted out of mopping mode so the mop wasn’t used on the carpet.

It also navigated easily underneath sofas, footstools and chairs – areas that often get missed in regular cleaning.

Another useful feature here is the DuoSpiral detangling brushes, which are designed to prevent hair and fur from wrapping around the rollers. For households with pets or long hair, this could save a fair bit of maintenance.

Despite working through several rooms, the robot was also very quiet. At times I barely noticed it running.

By the end, the entire ground floor of my house had been cleaned in around 45 minutes, and the robot only needed to recharge and service itself once.

FAQs

Does the eufy Omni C28 need much maintenance?

One of the main selling points of the Omni C28 is that most of the maintenance is handled automatically by the docking station. The all-in-one base station empties the dustbin, washes the mop roller, refills the clean water tank and collects dirty water.

However, you will still need to occasionally empty the wastewater tank, buy new dustbins, refill the clean water tank and clean the filters and brushes every so often to keep the robot running efficiently.

How loud is the eufy Omni C28 when cleaning?

The Omni C28 is relatively quiet compared with traditional upright vacuums. The maximum level it can reach is 67 dBs.

Does the robot work in low-light conditions?

The Omni C28 uses its iPath 2.0 navigation system, which allows it to detect obstacles and map rooms even in low light or under furniture. This means it can clean effectively at night or in darker rooms without needing the lights on.

Can you control the robot remotely?

Yes. The robot connects to the eufy Clean app, which allows you to start or stop cleaning cycles, adjust suction or water levels and set cleaning schedules remotely.

You can also use the app to see the robot’s room mapping and direct it to specific areas if you only want one room cleaned.

Will the eufy Omni C28 fall down the stairs?

I did also test the eufy Omni C28 upstairs and I did worry that it could fall down the stairs. However, it will scan if it is near an edge and stop itself everytime to prevent it falling an damaging itself.

Can the eufy Omni C28 go up slopes?

It can go up slopes as high as 45 degrees, however it cannot go up edges that are larger than an inch.

Is the eufy Omni C28 worth it?

If you’re looking for a robot vacuum that can both vacuum and mop with minimal maintenance, the eufy Omni C28 Robot Vacuum and Mop is one of the more compelling mid-range options currently available.

It also performs strongly for a robot in this price bracket. With 15,000Pa suction, it has enough power to lift dust, pet hair and debris from both hard floors and carpets. The HydroJet roller mop continuously cleans itself while scrubbing floors, helping prevent the streaking that some robot mops struggle with.

Originally launched at around £649, it is currently available for about £499 during Amazon’s Spring Deal promotions, making it considerably more affordable than many robot vacuums with similar automation features.

My partner has yet to finish his new build garage, built specially to house his pride and joy. Meanwhile, I was itching to use this new space to get rid of some clutter from the house, which is a very small, two-bedroom cottage.

But while my partner has added electric underfloor heating to the garage floor (apparently cars need such luxuries), he has yet to finish off the electrical work to connect it up and heat the space. This means the garage is very cold, raising the risk of stored items (and his car) becoming damaged by condensation, damp and mould while the weather is dank outside.

So when I was given the opportunity to test the Meaco DD8L pro desiccant dehumidifier I jumped at the chance. I wanted to see if this was the best dehumidifier to keep my stored items damp and mould free, while my partner was salivating at the thought of potentially giving his car optimum climate-controlled conditions.

Practicalities of using a dessicant dehumidifer in a cold space

It's important to understand why I chose to test this Meaco DD8L pro desiccant dehumidifier in a cold garage, rather than inside the main house.

When it comes to desiccant vs compressor dehumidifiers, desiccant dehumidifiers work better in colder spaces because they operate by absorbing moisture from the air with a desiccant material. Compressor dehumidifiers meanwhile use refrigerant to cool coils inside them so moisture can be removed from the air via condensation. For this condensation to occur, there needs to be a noticeable difference in coil temperature and room temperature, hence why compressor dehumidifiers tend to work better in warmer spaces like inside the house.

That said, a desiccant dehumidifier still needs a minimum temperature threshold of 1°C to make sure the machine doesn't freeze up. Given the lack of underfloor heating in the newbuild garage, to solve the problem for testing, I added an oil-filled radiator to the space to make sure the temperature was always higher than freezing.

Shop for using a dehumidifier in a garage

Unboxing the Meaco DD8L Pro

The Meaco DD8L pro desiccant dehumidifier arrived in a smart cardboard box that was well-packed, with protective inserts to stop the contents moving around and getting damaged.

The machine itself had a dust cover over it, meanwhile the information booklets on how to use the dehumidifier were easy to find when opening from the top. There was a large ergonomic indentation at the back of the machine for lifting the dehumidifier out of the box.

This particular model was fairly large so I would say it had a reasonable weight to it, but it was very easy to pull out of the box, even with the dust cover on it.

First impressions

The Meaco DD8L pro desiccant dehumidifier has all the hallmarks of a workhorse of a machine. And that's exactly what I needed for a large double bay garage with a concrete floor.

It has a decent 2 litre water collection tank, as well as having the option for continuous drainage, handy in a space that doesn't see regular footfall.

What's a nice touch with this particular dehumidifier is that it looks slick, with a dark top to it, so no dirty fingermarks show on areas where someone might be pressing buttons. It is fairly bulky owing to its 58cm x 36cm x 23cm dimensions, but this is to be expected if the machine is to be powerful enough to control humidity in larger spaces.

A smart-looking machine is of course ideal in a posh garage beside a fancy car. It might have been fun to be able to customise it in red to match the vehicle but, sadly, I don't think any dehumidifier offers this option.

What is cool about this particular machine though, is that it can be wall-mounted with the bracket designed by Meaco for this machine, making it ideal for space-saving in smaller garages. There's also a cable tidy on the back of the machine to hide away any unsightly wires when not in use. And, if you do decide to leave it on the floor, you can also buy separate castors on the Meaco website to be able to easily wheel it about.

Ease of use

Any dehumidifier will need to be left for 48 hours after delivery before attempting to turn it on. With compressor models this is to make sure compressor oil and refrigerant settles, much like a fridge, while desiccant dehumidifiers have a rotating desiccant wheel inside that also needs time to settle to avoid damage on start-up. You can read more this and how dehumidifiers work in our explainer on the topic.

Once I had waited, I plugged the Meaco DD8L pro desiccant dehumidifier in and pressed the "on" symbol. This was easy to find, to the bottom left of the control panel.

Immediately, the dehumidifier whirred into action, displaying the humidity reading of the room on the screen. Without having to adjust any settings, there was a clear indication of '55%RH' as the target room humidity setting it was aiming towards.

Despite a desiccant dehumidifier being ideal for colder spaces, I initially plugged in this dehumidifier inside the house so I could get a feel for the controls, before putting it into position beside the super car in the garage.

Overall, having used dehumidifiers before, I found this dehumidifier very easy to start up and use. It was literally one button to press after being connected to an electric source, before it started up and got to work instantly.

Using the control panel

The Meaco DD8L pro desiccant dehumidifier is impressively easy to operate, but does still have wide functionality. If you want a simple start, all you need to do is press the 'on' button after plugging it in and it will roar into action, with a target humidity reading of 55%RH, which is what you would usually want for normal humidity in a house.

Meanwhile, if you wanted to use this dehumidifier for laundry, you can easily press the T-shirt button to crank up the humidity setting to 35%RH which will whip more moisture from the air.

For my purposes in the garage, I found the ability to toggle between power settings very useful. I was able to set it at a low wattage with a slow fan speed to use minimal electricity. This was ideal for leaving the dehumidifier permanently on, controlling the humidity of the space at all times. Once its target humidity is reached – or the water tank is full – the dehumidifier also has an automatic shut off.

I loved that this dehumidifier had a germ and bacteria extraction setting too. While the new build garage doesn't have any damp or mould, I can see this being useful in older spaces. I have a damp wall in my house, and I often worry about airborne mould spores and bacteria around that space. Knowing my dehumidifier is removing these is added piece of mind.

Here's an overview of what all the different buttons on the DD8L do:

• On/off button. Turns the dehumidifier on or off. You'll find when you turn the dehumidifier off, it asks you to wait before unplugging the machine so it can cool down. This is little annoying, but I guess a helpful feature to avoid unintended damage.
• Large waterdrop button. Operate smart humidity mode by pressing this button once and automatically targeting a humidity setting of 55%RH. Pressing this button multiple times meanwhile will change the humidity to any required level.
• Small triple waterdrop button. Allows you to select the power of the dehumidifier and its fan speed. Select one drop for low fan speed and 200 watts of power, two drops for medium fan speed and 400 watts of power, and three drops for high speed fan and high power of 600 watts.
• T-shirt button. Pressing this button will activate smart laundry mode, giving the dehumidifier a target humidity setting of 35%RH. Press the smart humidity button (the large waterdrop) to stop laundry mode.
• Half-moon button. Press this button to activate night mode and child lock. This makes the dehumidifier much quieter by reducing the fan speed, fixing the louvre open, stopping the buttons from beeping and turning the lights off the display. Press the button twice to exit night mode.
• Clock button. You can switch a timer on with this button to make the dehumidifier start up at a specific time, or make it stop at a specific time.
• ++ and - symbol button. This is the ioniser and should be turned on when you want the dehumidifier to extract germs and bacteria from the air, as well as mould spores, odours and, apparently, ticks (yes really, apparently ticks become airborne and 'fly' through the air using static electricity to suck your blood). When this is on, it will show this same icon on the control panel.
• Louvre button. Operate the louvre on the top of the machine to either a fixed open position, or moving across a narrow, medium or wide position. The angle of the louvre will then display on the control panel.

Using the DD8L pro with a phone

I was looking forward to testing this dehumidifier on the Meaco app as it wasn't something I had done before. There wasn't much in the instruction manual about doing this, but a google-search found this YouTube video explaining how to set the dehumidifier up on the Meaco app.

After registering on the app, I went on to "add device". Both your dehumidifier and your phone need to be on the same WiFi network for this to be successful, and you need to know your WiFi password (a bit of a faff but I eventually found it). If this doesn't work, you can also follow the instructions to add the machine manually, but you'll still need to know your WiFi password.

I found using the dehumidifier with the app useful, mainly as it flagged when the water tank was empty, meaning I didn't need to keep checking in person. The app also tracked the humidity level in the garage, which allowed me to see how much work the dehumidifier was putting in to maintain the climate.

Overall the app was useful, but not essential, which probably is exactly what it should be.

Emptying the water collector

I've been using dehumidifiers a while and usually the removal of the water tank is a bit cumbersome, heavy to lift and fiddly to put back in. Generally you find access to the water tank is from the front, but the DD8L has a water tank that you pull out from the side.

This side-opening tank turned out to be much less cumbersome, and it even had a handle for carrying the tank to a sink for emptying. I was pretty impressed actually, perhaps because I've found them so annoying to handle in the past.

Like many desiccant units, this dehumidifier's water tank was on the smaller side, but I didn't find this a problem. I could still leave the dehumidifier for several days before needing to empty it – and the longer I used it in the space, the less attention it needed.

When the water tank is full, a full cup symbol appeared on the control panel and the dehumidifier switched itself off automatically.

Switching to continuous drainage mode

Unlike other machines, the continuous drainage on this machine is very easily accessible at the back, with its own removable rubber cover. This was perfect for use in a garage as there was no fiddling around trying to access it.

The spout, called the 'right angle adapter', meanwhile was hidden away in the water tank (ideal for not accidentally losing it) and slid easily into place. As with other Meaco dehumidifiers, it was annoying that no continuous drainage hose was included, although a piece of normal garden hose is apparently the right size for slotting onto the spout. You could also argue that sourcing one yourself means you can get the right length too.

It is worth noting that continuous drainage is gravity fed, so you do need a drain at the same level or below the machine for this to be workable, as well as a suitable outfall (drain, sink etc).

How did the dessicant dehumidifer perform?

This particular dehumidifier is absolutely perfect for use in a garage. Not only does this model perform efficiently in colder temperatures (as you would expect with a desiccant dehumidifier), but its adjustable power settings really tailor this machine for your space.

This gives users the choice to save on dehumidifier running costs by selecting a low watt setting, or cranking it up to max power for more needy spaces, and even whacking on the germ exterminator too.

But the DD8L Pro Desiccant dehumidifier, which is now available on Amazon, offers so much more; features that might not be useful inside a home, but are super useful in a garage or outbuilding. You can add wheels to move it around a large space, or a wall mount to increase useable floor space. Meanwhile, stick a hose on it and you've got yourself a secure, permanent drainage system.

Add to that the ability to control the dehumidifier remotely on your phone, or your Google Home Hub or Alexa, and you can give yourself a setup that rarely needs any input, saving you valuable time and effort.

While the Meaco DD8L pro desiccant dehumidifier is on the pricey end of the cost spectrum (desiccant dehumidifiers often are), I'd argue that for all the functionality it offers, this unit is well-worth the investment.

So, was the Meaco DD8L pro desiccant dehumidifier the perfect companion for the super car? Absolutely. Not only does this machine look cool next to the car, it is giving the garage (and the car) a steady 55%RH climate at all times. My partner is also more than happy to volunteer to look after it, which I take as a clear sign that the DD8L pro is doing an excellent job at giving his car the perfect storage climate while it is tucked up over winter.

If you are considering buying a dehumidifier for your home, don't make the dehumidifier mistake of skimping on your model. When it comes to budget vs premium dehumidifier, you'll end up getting a lot more value for money by investing in a unit that is powerful enough for the job.

I've always opted for larger dehumidifier models when choosing units to review for this magazine, simply because I don't live in an apartment and have always assumed something more substantial is needed to make a difference to the humidity levels in my small cottage in East Anglia.

So when I was sent this tiny MeacoDry Arete One 6L Compact dehumidifier quite by chance when the larger dehumidifier I was meant to review sold out, I wasn't expecting much. But after putting this machine, which is only 40cm high, through its paces, I found myself questioning my previous assumptions about the best dehumidifiers.

Rarely do I come across a product that impresses me so much as this compact machine, which is pitched as a dehumidifier best suited to be used on a room-by-room basis. Here's why.

Unboxing the 'half-size' dehumidifier

This 6L dehumidifier is nearly half the size of its parent dehumidifier; the MeacoDry Arete One 25L dehumidifier, meaning when the box arrived, it was much smaller and lighter, making it less difficult to handle.

The packaging opened with no problems at the top, and the operating instructions were positioned as the first thing you saw. These were useful and easy to follow, reminding first-time dehumidifier users to ensure the dehumidifier had rested for at least six hours before switching on.

I did find it a bit of effort easing the dehumidifier out of the box as there were no handles on the side of the machine as I expected. But after I removed the plastic bag, I discovered the handle cleverly tucked into the top of the unit. Not helpful for the initial removal, but fantastic for everyday use and portability.

In terms of parts, there were two sets of instructions (full manual and a quick start guide) and the dehumidifier to unbox, plus a free HEPA filter affixed to the machine. Overall, I found the unboxing experience very easy and simple.

First impressions of the MeacoDry Arete One 6L

I've only used larger dehumidifiers before, so I didn't really know what to expect from this much smaller size dehumidifier unit. I've always found the larger units very good and the larger tank a huge benefit.

However, once this smaller "half-size" unit was unpacked, I was immediately impressed by its size and look rather than finding it at all inferior as I was expecting. Being smaller, it was less dominant in the room, meaning it was far less noticeable.

Once I'd worked out how to pull up the handle, it dawned on me how much more portable this dehumidifier was compared to the larger models. Typically, with larger models, I've ended up avoiding moving them too much as it's a bit of a faff lugging it up and down stairs, especially if there is any water in the tank. But this smaller unit lifts up to transport so easily, without being at all heavy, I can imagine moving it fairly regularly from room to room, depending on where it might be needed.

The design is also pretty slick. My model was the "charcoal" one, which is nice because all the areas where dirt and grime might accumulate (the rear air filter area and the top where you press the buttons) are darker meaning unsightly marks are disguised.

How I tested the dehumidifier

When testing the MeacoDry Arete One 6L Compact dehumidifier, I wanted to find out the answer to the following questions:

• Was it easy to operate?
• Was it effective in laundry mode?
• How quiet was it?
• How effective was it as an air purifier?
• How energy efficient and affordable is it?

I decided to test the small dehumidifier in three different settings in my home. First on a damp spot in the bathroom, second for drying laundry in the utility room, and lastly in a bedroom with single pane windows while sleeping.

Ease of operating the 6L dehumidifier

Turning the dehumidifier on for the first time was easy. All I needed to do was put it in the room I wanted to target, plug it in and press the "on" button.

I started off testing in the bathroom, where we had installed a glass shower panel during renovations rather than a shower enclosure. The glass panel hadn't been as effective as hoped, meaning spray from the shower regularly finds itself on the wooden skirting board, wall and limestone tiles outside the tray, causing a minor damp issue.

While an annoying problem, it was a good test for the half-size dehumidifier to see if it could make a difference by bringing down the humidity in the room.

The initial start-up

After positioning the dehumidifier in the bathroom and pushing down on the "on" button, the unit started dehumidifying the air without needing to press any of the other three buttons. The screen also lit up and helpfully gave me a room humidity reading of 65% on the screen, with a target humidity level of 55% already set automatically. Overall, I found the ease of initial start-up fantastic and unfaultable.

Setting the target humidity level

The quick start manual took me as far as turning the machine on, so it was time to take a deeper dive into the fuller instruction booklet to have a play around with adjusting the target humidity level.

I discovered this was achieved by pressing the water drop button either once for setting a "smart" target humidity of 55% or repeatedly pressing to scroll through target humidity options from 40% through to 70%. There was also a "CO" option available to set the dehumidifier to continuous.

A droplet with two arrows pointing upward shows on the screen when the dehumidifier is in dehumidifying mode. I found this moderately easy to operate, but definitely needed the instruction manual to understand how to do it.

Overall, I found the ease of operating the MeacoDry Arete One 6L Compact dehumidifier excellent. Despite needing the instruction manual to find my way around in the first instance, it was easy to remember how to make the adjustments after that.

In terms of how effective the dehumidifier was on the damp in the bathroom, it dropped the humidity down to a sensible level of 55% with ease when left in there overnight. I was impressed this tiny dehumidifier managed it, without the tank becoming full before the target level was reached.

Using the dehumidifier in laundry mode

After testing the dehumidifier in the bathroom, I moved it into the utility room to see if the dehumidifier would help speed up drying the handwashing on my drying rack. There is also a degree of humidity in this room anyway as I regularly have the washing machine, tumble dryer and handwashing sinks in action at the same time.

Setting laundry mode was fairly self explanatory for anyone that has used a dehumidifier before, it was the button with the T-shirt on it. Pressing this button once, set the target humidity level to 35% with a high fan speed, and the dehumidifier automatically switched itself off after six hours meaning it could be left on overnight without fear of sucking up too much humidity and wasting energy unnecessarily. A quick look at the instruction manual revealed that you can check how many hours are left on the timer by pressing the T-shirt button twice.

One thing I really loved was that I could easily lift and position the dehumidifier on the worktop. We don't have a large amount of floor space in our utility room, and it is a bit of a walk-through area, so being able to do this was incredibly useful.

Placing the dehumidifier on the worktop also gave me the chance to test its continuous drainage function and I quickly found that while a spout was included, tucked cleverly away in the water tank, it was a bit disappointing that there wasn't a hose pipe included with the unit. When I fixed the spout to the correct outlet, it wasn't long enough to drain straight into the sink. As a result, without a handy piece of hose, I had to abandon testing this and stick to using the water tank.

Overall, the dehumidifier surprised me at how effective it was in laundry mode, arguably just as effective as a larger model. I left the unit for the full six hours and found my clothing nicely dried afterwards – saving me the hassle of dealing with any nasty damp smells and needing to do any rewashing.

Noise levels when using the dehumidifier at night

After testing the dehumidifier in both the bathroom and laundry room, I was confident about sleeping in the same room as this small unit. The MeacoDry Arete One 6L Compact dehumidifier had already proven itself to be extremely quiet when running, as low as only 32 decibels (the quietest Arete One dehumidifier), even with the full fan speed turned on in laundry mode.

Even so, I dutifully switched the unit to "night mode" to avoid any chance of the dehumidifier being loud by pressing the half moon button, to trigger a slower, quieter fan speed and the screen lights to turn off. This would create optimal sleeping conditions so I could wake up the next morning with no condensation on the single pane windows in the room without it being disruptive in the night.

A quick check over of the guide showed that the humidity level could still be checked while the screen light was off by pressing the half moon button once. There was also a child lock mode (indicated with a padlock) set by holding this half moon button down for two seconds.

The next morning, I woke to condensation-free windows after an undisturbed sleep so it got a resounding thumbs up. There was certainly no need for a more powerful machine in my double-sized bedroom.

Using the dehumidifier as an air purifier

I didn't actually realise this dehumidifier was also an air purifier at first, but it turns out, air purifying happens automatically while dehumidifying if a HEPA filter is fitted.

A read of the instructions highlighted that this clever little unit can also be used exclusively as an air purifier on its own. Is that actually useful? Well, yes because in times when there might be low humidity, like the summer, you might want air purifying in your room to ease allergies without having to run the dehumidifier simultaneously.

Air purifying mode was selected using the same water drop button but holding it down for two seconds to select "AP" mode. This was easy once I'd read up on how to do it, but in all honesty I probably wouldn't have worked it out without doing that.

You can confirm the dehumidifier is in air purifier mode by checking the icon with the arrow pointing right with a line cutting through it, is visible on the screen. Overall, I found this function most useful at night to avoid waking up stuffy. I always find air purifiers difficult to test conclusively, but can confirm I had a comfortable night's sleep with it switched on.

Affordability of the MeacoDry Arete One 6L

The energy efficiency of this 6L unit is something to really shout about at only 101 watts, compared to 151 watts for the 12L model and 267 watts for the 25L model. This gave it a 3p per hour cost based on 26.35p/kWh energy pricing. There is also an argument that by targeting a home room-by-room, this can also keep down the running time of the dehumidifier, thus lowering dehumidifier running costs.

Affordability of the unit however was where I was initially a little disappointed. With an almost half-size model, I naturally expected a half-size price tag. Yet this 6L model was priced at £129.99 on the Meaco website, while the larger 12L version was £179.99 on the Meaco website in comparison; only a £50 difference. However, the larger 25L version was a larger jump up in price at £299.99 on the Meaco website.

But on further reflection, you could argue that a smaller dehumidifier should actually command a higher price tag if it performs the same job, with the same performance, while taking up less space. Certainly this can be true when it comes to other technology such as computers.

So is my initial disappointment over the price justified? Absolutely not when you take all this into account. Its smaller stature ended up being a huge benefit rather than a hindrance. I was able to move the unit far more easily from one room to the next, potentially saving on needing to buy a second unit, and it packed away easily into a kitchen cupboard when not in use. The MeacoDry Arete One 6L Compact dehumidifier was also much quieter and economical than a larger dehumidifier so all-in-all it is being sold at a hugely competitive price point.

Shop MeacoDry Arete One 6L dehumidifier

Final thoughts

It goes without saying that I definitely recommend the MeacoDry Arete One 6L Compact dehumidifier. It is not only excellently priced, it is highly portable (more of a plus than I realised before testing), yet also highly effective despite its tiny size.

And for that reason, I would snap up one of these small dehumidifiers, before it too is sold out like the other Meaco dehumidifier I was meant to review.

If you are looking to alleviate damp or stop mould in a garage, colder outbuilding or campervan or caravan with a power source, you would be much better opting for a desiccant dehumidifier specially designed to handle lower temperatures and this kind of environment.

You can read up on my review of the EcoAir DD2 desiccant dehumidifier, which I highly recommend, or if you prefer sticking to the Meaco brand, you can hold on for my review of the Meaco DD8L Pro Desiccant Dehumidifier in January when it is back in stock on the Meaco website.

Let's face it, there is never a problem with having too much storage in your home. The problem comes when you don't have enough space to put the storage.

Bedroom storage ideas are a prime example of this, with wardrobes quickly filling up walls and beds taking over the floor. The solution I recommend time and time again? Ottoman beds. I purchased the Dusk Berkley Ottoman Storage Bed in a similar Black Friday deal two years ago, and I've never regretted it since.

So, if you need a new guest bed quickly, or are even eyeing up one for your master bedroom, here's why I rate it and think you will too.

What's it like?

The Dusk Berkeley Ottoman Storage Bed in natural is a linen look fabric covered ottoman bed with a winged headboard. It comes in three sizes – double, king size and super king size.

The sides and base of the bed are covered in the same fabric as the headboard, and it has a wooden slatted base in a metal frame. It doesn't come with a mattress, but you can purchase a Dusk if you want to streamline your purchasing.

I opted to buy the SleepSoul Bliss 800 Pocket Memory Pillow Top Mattress that's currently reduced at Mattress Online, when I bought my bed as I'd had one of these mattresses before and knew how comfortable they were.

Visually, the bed has clean lines and a classical contemporary finish. The star of the show? The ample storage that sits underneath the base and is accessed via an easy-lift gas mechanism. To access the storage you simply pull on a fabric handle at the base of the bed, and to close it once open, you press both hands on top of the mattress, or hold onto the frame base and push down.

As the bed isn't raised off the floor, there's a fabric base that protects your carpet or bedroom flooring below which can be lightly vacuumed or brushed clean.

Ease of assembly

I'm a bit stubborn when it comes to putting furniture together, which has led me to undertake solo construction of items that are probably a two person job. This Orin White Wooden Storage Bunk Bed Frame from Happy Beds, (a great option if you're looking for bunk bed ideas as it's also currently reduced), was probably the worst one I tackled, but, I did, and it never fell apart.

My point is, the Dusk Berkeley Ottoman Bed is probably another item that would be easier assembled with two pairs of hands, but if you're worried about putting an ottoman bed together, don't be. I managed it by myself.

The frame and headboard are fairly easy to construct, but there'a bit more time and energy required on the base and gas lift mechanism. I'll admit to sitting there for quite a while not understanding how to make it work, and in fact did it wrong the first time. But, after a much needed coffee break and a clear mind, I started again and resolved the problem.

How I've found using the bed

Living in a relatively small apartment with no built in storage, I'm reliant on freestanding storage solutions to house everything we own. I needed an ottoman bed for a wide variety of items, ranging from spare bedding through to somewhere to hide Christmas presents.

Readers, the Dusk Berkley Ottoman Bed did and does not disappoint. It has provided a home for so many different items, so much so that when I next replace any of the other beds in my home, I will only be buying ottoman beds.

Although you can buy plenty of under-bed storage solutions for other types of beds, the most satisfying thing about an ottoman is that you don't have to try and disguise what's hidden underneath your bed. Once the lid is closed, it's completely out of sight.

Of course, out of sight out of mind does mean you do need to regularly remember to go under the bed, have a good decluttering session and clean it out.

I use storage bags for some items, such as these Veno 4 Pack Large Storage Bags from Amazon, to make the job a little easier, but as the items are essentially on the floor and there isn't any real ventilation, it's important to make sure you don't put any damp items in there or you could find yourself ending up with bedroom mould problems.

It's also worth noting that while the bed has a gas lift mechanism, do remember that you're lifting wooden slats, a metal frame and mattress when you access the storage. It's takes an initial fairly hefty pull and push to open and close the base of the bed, so if you have issues with arm strength do take this into account.

That said, would I recommend it to someone looking for an ottoman bed? Absolutely. I've lost count of the number of times I've praised it for its style and storage volume, so much so that one of my closest friends has ended up purchasing the same model for her bedroom.

One of the other things I loved about the bed was the colour and finish. The natural linen finish means it can work well in lots of different bedroom colour schemes. It's also the perfect match with this year's interior design trends too.

I've also got my eye on the Hattie 2 Door Wardrobe with Drawer which has a beautiful fluted finish, again a key feature in this year's design predictions. If I had the space, I'd certainly be considering walk in wardrobe ideas, but until I move again, it's freestanding furniture for me and Dusk remains one of my favourite places to shop.

I’ve tested a lot of home security cameras over the years, and the installation process has always been the part I’ve dreaded most.

Drilling, levelling brackets, climbing ladders, and committing a camera to a fixed position always made the process feel more complicated than it should be.

But the eufy C35 camera - that's on sale at Amazon for £44.99 -changed that entirely with one simple, ingenious feature that allowed me to mount every camera on metal surfaces around my property in seconds - without sacrificing performance or stability – making it one of the best home security systems I've ever used.

Effortless installation with one ingenious feature

The magnetic mount on the eufy C35 is the feature that transforms the whole experience. I installed three cameras:

• One on a metal gate facing the garden
• One on a metal driveway gate
• One on a metal post overlooking the road

Each installation took seconds – literally. No tools, no screws, no measuring, and no drilling into uneven, hard-to-reach surfaces.

The magnets are strong enough to keep each camera secure through wind and rain, and the flexibility to reposition them instantly means I can change angles or coverage without any effort.

This is a huge contrast to my previous eufy setup, where I reviewed the S3 Pro and SoloCam S340. Those cameras delivered outstanding performance, but installation meant screwing them into my property’s exterior – a time-consuming job on pebble-dashed walls.

With the C35, not only is installation dramatically faster, but the magnetic design also doesn’t affect performance in the slightest.

Crisp resolution and PureColor night vision

Once installed, the C35’s image quality stood out immediately. The footage is sharp enough to capture vehicles approaching from the road, details in the garden, and movement at my gates with clarity that rivals far more expensive systems.

The PureColor Vision night mode is one of the most impressive features. Instead of the typical black-and-white infrared, the C35 records in full colour even in low light.

This makes identifying people, animals, or vehicles at night far easier, and it gives far more confidence reviewing footage if something happens after dark.

Smart AI detection and local storage with no subscription

Paired with the HomeBase Mini, the eufy C35 offers a fully subscription-free security setup – something that continues to set eufy apart.

The AI detection is quick and accurate, recognising:

• People
• Vehicles
• Pets
• Faces
• Movements within activity zones

What surprised me most was how naturally the system works together. Cross-camera tracking links the footage as someone moves across the property, meaning I see a full timeline rather than separate clips. And with local storage up to 1TB on the HomeBase Mini, I never have to worry about monthly fees or cloud subscriptions.

Wi-Fi range: A small limitation

To keep things realistic, the C35’s range is limited to how far it is from the Wi-Fi, which maxes out at roughly 20 yards from the router or HomeBase Mini.

My gate cameras sit well within this distance and work perfectly, but anyone installing further away may need a Wi-Fi extender or a more central HomeBase position.

Is the eufy C35 worth it?

Yes – without question. The C35 has the fastest and easiest installation I’ve experienced, yet it maintains the clarity, AI intelligence, and reliability I expect from eufy’s higher-end cameras.

The fact that its effortless magnetic mounting doesn’t reduce performance in any way makes it even more appealing.

The combination of simple installation, excellent colour night vision, accurate alerts, and subscription-free local storage makes the eufy C35 one of the most cost-effective home security systems you can buy.

And as someone who has dealt with screw-mounted systems like the S3 Pro and S340, I can safely say the C35 solves the biggest issue I’ve ever had with camera installations - while still delivering brilliant results.

In this Henry HVR160 review I share my experience of using it for more than five years, to tidy up after DIY successes (and disasters) and general use around the home.

It's a canister vacuum cleaner, which means that the main unit and cleaning head are connected by a long hose. This makes it perfect for getting into difficult spaces, and useful for getting replacement parts since they are all easily accessible. With powerful suction, dust-free emptying and a robust design, is there anything it can't do?

Over the years I have tested a lot of vacuum cleaners, and I haven't held back in stretching their capabilities – especially with this one. As a mum-of-two and someone who likes stripping wallpaper, knocking through walls and sanding skirting, let me tell you how it made the cut onto our list of the best vacuum cleaners for builders' dust. You can then weigh up if it's the one for you.

Unboxing and setting up the Henry HVR160

The Henry HVR160 arrives by courier, and it takes no second guesses as to what is inside the box. Clearly branded and labelled, the cardboard box is purpose made for shipping this Henry. The only plastic used was a bag that contained a Tapered Adapter, Crevice Tool, Dusting Tool and Brush and Mattress Tool, which will come in handy when cleaning the home – rather than clearing up after a DIY success or disaster.

There's a set of owner instructions that explains how everything fits together, but if you've seen a Henry before then familiarity trumps.

A bag is already in place to collect the dust from your DIY project or house renovation, so the only set-up required is to connect the three-piece tube set, attach it to the hose and then screw said hose onto the main unit. With no battery to charge and no fancy smart features, the Henry HVR160 is ready to use within minutes.

First impressions

When the Henry HVR160 is put together it looks like a useful piece of kit, with all the tools secured onto the on-board storage and the otherwise gangly floorhead secured by a clip at the back of the canister.

It's on a set of wheels so I can either push it by foot or pull it by a hand on the hose to move it around. There is also a retractable handle on the top that I used to carry it into different rooms or up the stairs, or hauled up a ladder to the attic.

I like that there is some discreet cable management underneath the handle, so that the 10m power cable can be wound away when I've finished a job. The generous 6L bag is also neatly contained in the canister so all the dust and debris will be out of sight and out of mind, that is until it's full and needs replacing.

Henry HVR160 specifications

• Power: 620w
• Capacity: 6L
• Cable length: 10m
• Hose length: 2.2m
• Cleaning range: 25.7m
• Weight: 7.5kg
• Dimensions: 320 x 340 x 345mm
• Additional tools: Crevice Tool, Dusting Tool, Brush & Mattress Tool

Using the Henry HVR160 for DIY

The Henry HVR160 has helped us out in two home renovations and continues to be a reliable companion through all our DIY successes, and failures. What we love about it is that no mess is too big or too small – it will literally suck up everything (provided it is not a liquid). Dust, stones, chipped bricks, plasterboard, insulation and wood shavings are just some examples of how much it has tidied up for us.

It's currently sat in our attic. We (my husband) are in the throes of insulating the loft and boarding out the space, to prevent heat loss from the bedrooms below and maximise the area for loft storage. A lot of dust comes with chipboard and rock wool insulation, as well as flyaways as the main bulk of the insulation is laid.

We've removed the floorhead and three-piece stainless tube set so we're more agile in the somewhat cramped space. This means that we're only using the hose with tapered adapter to suck up the mess, and the Henry takes it in its stride. The hose doesn't get blocked and the canister bag is filling up nicely.

The wheels on the canister make it easy to pull into a tight spot. I just need to remind my husband to unplug and rewind the 6m power cable so that the attic isn't anymore treacherous than it already is.

Switching to home use

As well as tidying after a DIY project, the Henry HVR160 can also be used to clean the carpet, floors, skirting, crevices and upholstery around the home.

The Combi Floor Tool attaches to the three-piece stainless steel tube set. On the top of this tool is a paddle which can be pressed down for hard floors, and up for carpets. I found that it did a great job of cleaning both floor types, but the fluff from our new wool carpets did quickly build on the underside of the tool so I need to stop and start a few times to keep clearing it. This floor tool transitioned well between rooms too.

For cleaning skirting boards you can either use the Crevice Tool or Brush, but I found it easier to remove the tube set from the hose and just run the Tapered Adapter along the top. I personally found these tools more useful when cleaning the car.

Through a house move and general lack of organisation, I have unfortunately misplaced the tools but it's good to see that a replacement kit comprising the tools, hose and stainless-steel tube set can be bought from Amazon for £44.99.

If you think that you'll be scaling back on the DIY ambitions and using the Henry HVR160 more around the home, it would be worth considering the noise levels. I recorded 82dB during testing which is equivalent to heavy traffic or loud singing.

Cleaning, maintenance and storage

The Henry HVR160 is one of the easiest vacuum cleaners I have had to maintain in all my years of owning a vacuum cleaner. You'll just need to check the nozzle and floorhead for blockages, and replace the canister bags when full. A pack of 10 Henry replacement bags are £12 [Amazon] so while you do have an ongoing cost, what I will say is that this Henry will stuff the bag full before it needs swapping out.

To store, the cable can be wound in and the tools can be stowed on the on-board storage. The floorhead with three-piece stainless-steel tube can also be clipped onto the back of the canister in an upright position, but I found that this clip is a weak spot and the height of the floorhead clipped on could make it difficult to fit into a space out of the way.

How does it rate online?

Looking at TrustPilot reviews, the Henry HVR160 (and his friends) has 1767 reviews and has been awarded 4.8 out of 5 stars. Reviewers speak highly about how easy it is to fit together, the powerful suction and the useful attachments. It's not easy to find any negative comments but I have managed to find one who says that they find it a bit cumbersome to move around and the suction adjuster on the handle is difficult to turn on.

Over on Argos, 98% of customers recommend the HVR160. It's received high praise for its powerful suction, ease of use and excellent value for money. Users appreciate its performance on both carpets and hard floors, along with its long cord and generous dust bag capacity. However, some users report that they struggle to move the floorhead around and that the hose gets blocked.

And on Currys, 4 out of 5 stars has been awarded out of 10,747 reviews. The performance, ease of use and value for money is all spoken highly off. Yet some users struggle with pet hair removal (there's a separate tool for this) and that it keeps falling apart.

How does it compare?

While the Henry HVR160 is fantastic for dry messes, you may need to call in Charles CVC370 for the big stuff. This is a wet/dry vacuum cleaner which is ready to clean up plumbing disasters or clean out the garage. It has a larger 1000W motor and a larger 9L capacity for dry stuff, and 15L capacity for wet stuff.

Another option is the Karcher WD4 Wet & Dry vacuum cleaner (available on Amazon) which has a 2.2m long hose as standard. This is longer than Charles' 1.8m hose. The extra length would be beneficial when clearing blockages, although an extra long 6m long hose can be bought for Charles for £16.99 on Amazon if you already own one.

The 10m power cable on the HVR160 may be too restricting for other fellow DIYers too. The Makita DVC750LZ (available on Amazon) is a lightweight, portable cordless vacuum cleaner. Like Charles, it can also clean wet and dry messes but on a smaller scale because it has half the capacity.

In terms of price, the Henry HVR160 offers excellent value for money. It's priced at £119 which is cheaper than Charles CVC370 (RRP £169), Karcher WD4 (RRP £139.98) and Makita DVC750 (RRP £159.99). Whist it's not a wet and dry vacuum cleaner, it can be used anywhere in the home which may be the better option for you if you tend to dip in and out of projects.

Should you buy the Henry HVR160?

The Henry HVR160 is a brilliant buy if you need a vacuum cleaner that is robust, reliable and low maintenance. It has ample suction to clear away dust, wood shavings, small pieces of rubble, plasterboard scraps and insulation flyaways. Yes, the bags are an ongoing cost but you'll rarely need to replace them and, honestly, it's well worth containing the dry DIY messes in this way so you don't make the mess again when emptying.

It is noisy compared to other household vacuum cleaners, but the performance outweighs this in my mind. I did also find that when storing the floorhead and hose in an upright position it felt flimsy, although after years of use it will find its own safe space in whatever configuration – as it has done at our house.

Looking to clear up the mess from other DIY and renovation projects? Our favourite window vacs will clear dust and dirt from windows and doors in no time, while the best pressure washers are perfect for messy outdoor jobs.

Why do I need a multi-use power tool? This is exactly what I was thinking when the Black & Decker MultiEvo Multi Tool arrived. Surely it can’t be as good as my single-use power tools. But at the same time, I was prepared to give it a go without any preconceptions.

As an experienced DIYer, I’ve used a lot of Black + Decker tools (I still have my drill from over 10 years ago), and they haven’t disappointed, so I thought it could be a real winner. Offering plenty of versatility at a price point that occasional DIYers will like.

But there’s always one point of contention with cordless tools: battery life. How will the MultiEvo Multi Tool perform compared to other best multi tools in our tests? Read on to find out.

Specs and features

• Battery voltage: 18v
• Battery type: Lithium Ion
• Weight: 4kg
• Guarantee: One year
• Speed: Variable - up to 7500rpm
• Features: Magnetic bit holder, LED work light, Torque adjustment collar
• In the box: 1 x hammer drill head, 1 x Jigsaw head, 1 x sanding head, 1 x 1.5Ah battery, 1 x charger, 1 x 16" toolbox, 5 x drill bits, 5 x Jigsaw blades, 5 x sander sheets.

BUY THE BLACK & DECKER MULTIEVO MULTI TOOL FROM ARGOS TODAY

Unboxing and first impressions

The Black & Decker MultiEvo Multi Tool is neatly packed in its own sturdy 16-inch toolbox. All I needed to do was remove the cardboard wrapper, and I was ready to go. Unlike some carry cases that come with kits or sets, this wasn’t a cheap add-on. It was well-made and seemed built to last, I reckon, as long as the tool itself.

The toolbox provided the perfect carry case for the multi tool body, attachments, and battery charger, with just enough room for an extra attachment if needed. It also features a couple of neat storage compartments integrated into the lid, perfect for storing the included drill bits and jigsaw blades.

The body of the tool felt sturdy, and I liked the rubber handle, which offered a good grip. I also noticed a magnetic drill bit holder positioned on top of the body. The double-ended bit was definitely staying put until needed – a simple but neat touch that shows thought has been put into the design of the MultiEvo.

Setting up drill, sander and saw attachments

A multi-tool requires more effort to prepare your preferred attachment, but luckily, the process is straightforward and intuitive. Each attachment slides and clicks into place neatly, and changing them is as simple as pulling back the quick-release button and extracting the attachment.

The drill attachment offers various options, including torque and hammer settings, which are easy to understand. The sander attachment only needs a pad attached, while the jigsaw involves a bit more work, but remains simple to change blades. One safety feature I particularly liked is that the trigger locks when an attachment is removed, so there's no need to remove the battery to swap heads. If you're unsure how to use any of the attachments, each one comes with a manual included in the set.

How well did the Black & Decker MultiEvo work?

Unlike a single-use power tool, there’s more to consider with a multi-tool. First, the body and attachments need to be put together. This was easy for all, and the first attachment we tested was the detail sander. Included are five good-quality pads in various grits – P60, P80, and P120 – that cover most sanding DIY tasks. The pad's position relative to the body made it really easy to use.

I tested by sanding stairs, walls, door frames and plywood shelving, which I am putting together. The pad ensured I got into all corners and did a decent job. There is an easy-to-use exhaust attachment to help redirect dust. No bag, though.

Next up was the drill attachment. Again, easy to attach, set up and use. We tried the typical tests with the provided drill bits. The wood bits were better than the masonry bits, a small point, and you can buy drill bits like this BLACK+DECKER 50 Pc. Mixed Drill and Screwdriver Bit Set from Amazon, if you need. There were various torque settings and a hammer setting that gave a little extra oomph when drilling into walls.

We made good use of the Phillips and flat-head double-end drill bit. There’s only one included, so you will need to invest in new screwdriver bits quite quickly, but you can buy reasonably priced sets like this DEWALT Screwdriver Bit Set from Amazon to keep you going.

Last up was the jigsaw attachment. This came with five 10 TPI wood blades (also usable on plastic), making it a good all-round choice. Inserting the blades was quick and easy. A small handle at the back of the attachment needs to be pushed down for a quick fit. I suggest inserting the blade before adding the attachment, it's just easier and safer in my opinion.

To test the saw, we kicked off by cutting 18mm plywood. The MultiEvo provided enough power to slowly cut through the plywood. It was pretty straightforward to use; the blade worked as well as any other jigsaw blade I've used. Next, we tried it on 6mm hardboard, which, as you might expect, was easier to cut through than the plywood. Finally, it was a plastic plumbing pipe which it breezed through.

Battery life

Battery life is critical on cordless tools, and with the Black & Decker MultiEvo Multi Tool we were left wanting more. Included is a small, lightweight 1A Charger and a 1.5Ah battery. These are the minimum requirements for a cordless tool. There’s no doubt that a larger battery and faster charger would have pushed the MultiEvo towards five stars.

Straight out of the box, the battery took three to four hours to reach full capacity, which lasted 30-45 mins (depending on the job). This makes it ideal for small DIY projects, but if you’ve got a sanding project, the battery time wouldn’t be enough to complete it, which can be annoying.

My recommendation for any cordless tool is to get a backup battery and keep it fully charged so you can continue working when you want. And, this is definitely the case for the Black & Decker MultiEvo Multi Tool.

THE FINAL VERDICT

If you don’t own a cordless drill, electric sander or jigsaw – or are in the market for a replacement – this multitool is a budget-friendly, multi-talented tool that is a top choice, especially for novice and occasional DIYers.

Not only do you get the three attachments (typically the most commonly used in my opinion), but you get the extras you need (drill bits/sanding pads/jigsaw blades) to use the multi-tool straight out of the toolbox

And you are not restricted to the three attachments; Black + Decker has a whole range of attachments (like this BLACK+DECKER Multievo Multi-tool Impact Driver Attachment from Amazon) and this Black and Decker MULTiEVO Multi Tool Oscillating Attachment from Tooled-Up, that can make the tool even more valuable. There are even attachments outside the DIY sphere.

It's this versatility and the toolbox that make the MultiEvo the complete package. But there is a downside, admittedly one that can be easily remedied. The battery life is limited, and the charging times are long. But invest in an additional, larger Ah battery (like this BLACK+DECKER 18V 4.0Ah Lithium Ion Battery from Amazon), or even a couple, and charge overnight, and you will get much improved battery life and a lot less time waiting between charges.

There’s no doubt that winter is the worst possible time for your boiler to break down. When the weather has taken a turn for the worse and temperatures are plunging, you want your home to be as warm and cosy as possible.

What’s more, if it does break down then you could be faced with a lengthy delay while you try to choose a new boiler and, more importantly, find an available heating engineer to fit it. This is the time of year when they are busiest with installations and boiler repairs, so chances are you could be without heating and hot water for a while.

With the BOXT boiler installation service, however, the company can offer a next day installation service. Music to the ears of anyone with a boiler that has finally given up during a cold snap. To find out how easy the BOXT installation service is to use, I put it to the test to upgrade my old boiler with a newer model.

Why I wanted to upgrade my boiler

Although I have had my boiler serviced annually to ensure it’s in good working order, it’s now 14 years old and as each year passes the chance of problems developing is becoming more likely.

I've always been really pleased with my Worcester Bosch Greenstar CDi combi boiler, so I was keen to replace my boiler with something similar. I live in a three-bedroom, 1930s semi with one bathroom. I installed the boiler when I originally renovated the house 14 years ago and have had the same one ever since.

I've also upgraded the glazing throughout the house and replaced several radiators, although there are still a few more on the list to be updated as they have definitely seen better days now and don’t always heat up particularly well.

Our boiler is located in a cupboard in our kitchen and I had no plans to move it to a different location, so this install would be a straight swap from old boiler to new.

Getting started with the booking

I found the process of selecting my new boiler surprisingly straightforward. The BOXT website is easy to navigate and there are advice guides to talk you through how the process works.

I went straight to the boilers section to book my installation and had to answer a series of questions about my home and what heating setup I currently have. There’s nothing overly complicated to answer, and you’ll just need to provide responses to these sorts of questions:

• The type of fuel you use to heat your home (gas, LPG, oil)
• What type of boiler you have
• How you would describe your current boiler (old and inefficient, not working, doesn’t fit with your plans)
• Whether it’s wall mounted or floor standing
• How old the boiler is
• How long you see yourself living in your current home
• Whether you want the boiler in a different place
• What sort of house you live in
• How many bedrooms it has
• How many baths and showers you have (or plan to have)
• How many radiators you have
• Whether you have a water meter
• Where the flue comes out, the shape of the flue and how far your boiler is from an outside wall
• How far the flue is from the ground and how close it is to another property
• Whether the flue is under a carport and 30cm or more from a door or window

If you do struggle with any of the questions, there is an FAQ section on the website or alternatively you can call the helpline for advice.

Once you have answered the questions online, you enter your postcode and you’re then presented with a list of suitable boilers based on your answers.

Choosing my new boiler

I was given a list of around 20 different boilers from a range of leading brands, including Worcester Bosch, Vaillant, Baxi and Navien. Each option clearly details the key product listings, such as dimensions, heating output, hot water flow rate, warranty and how many radiators it can power. This allows you to further compare the different products to ensure you are selecting the one that best suits your home and your needs.

It also shows the fixed price installation cost option, as well as the monthly cost option and any discounts that are currently available. It’s worth noting that these change throughout the year. When I originally booked mine there was a free Hive mini thermostat offer, and currently there is a Black Friday boiler sale with a discount of £125 on all boilers.

Again, if at this point you feel you would benefit from speaking to an advisor to help you choose the best type of boiler for your home, you can contact BOXT to go through your options in more detail. As I’ve been really happy with my current Worcester Bosch boiler I was keen to replace it with something similar, eventually opting for the Worcester Bosch Greenstar 4000 30kw, which is the upgraded model to the one I already have in my home.

It showed a fixed price cost for the boiler and installation of £2,395. Having looked online for this specific boiler, the cost of the boiler alone to me as a consumer averaged around the £1,400 mark, but then I would have to also arrange for a heating engineer to come and fit it for me.

According to Checkatrade, installation costs alone can often average between £1,000 and £2,000, so the total price for the boiler and installation offered by BOXT seemed competitive. There were some cheaper and more expensive options available on the BOXT website, but I know this boiler brand and the model was suitable for our heating requirements. It also had the capacity for a few more radiators to be added to our heating system in the future if we needed it, and was offered with a 10-year warranty for peace of mind.

Having selected the boiler, I was then taken to the next stage where I could choose things like the heating controls. A programmable thermostat is included in the price, but you can upgrade to smart thermostats like Hive for an added cost.

I also had minor additional costs added to the quote for a plume management kit (£70) and a Shock Arrestor Boiler Protection Pack (£40), which were automatically added because of the answers I had provided to some of the questions. These were a requirement for the installation, rather than an option

You can also add optional extras such as a Magna Cleanse Flush (£199), which helps to clean out your system and prolong the lifespan of your boiler, and an in-line scale reducer (£65), which was recommended to me because I live in a hard water area. There is no obligation to add any of these other extras to your installation, so you can limit your costs if budget is your key priority.

You’re then taken to a final checkout screen where everything in your order is clearly itemised with the associated costs breakdown and a final total for the boiler cost. You can pay the total amount upfront, or there are also options for finance and monthly payment plans.

Booking the BOXT installation

Once you’re happy with your order, you go through to the calendar screen to book your installation date. Providing you place your order, provide any requested photographs and answer any questions that the in-house technical team may have before 3pm (see below for more on this part of the process), BOXT can offer a next-day installation.

The next day option was showing for me, but it’s worth noting that at really busy times of the year there might be a small additional charge for this due to increased demand. According to BOXT, this can range from £5 up to £150, but they say that between the months of April to August you wouldn’t expect to see a surcharge of any amount.

Saturday installations can also carry an additional charge, however, this again varies depending on the volume of installations already booked for that specific weekend and would generally range from £50-£100.

I’ve gone through the initial booking process on a couple of occasions after I originally booked mine, to check how availability differed if I was to make a completely new booking. I have been pleasantly surprised by how soon I could book an installation on all occasions, with the price ranges quoted above being accurate. I did this throughout the month of November, so at a time when you would expect the service to be particularly busy, too.

One thing you might also spot, however, is that some days actually show a discount for installation. So if your boiler hasn’t broken down and you aren’t in a rush to have your new one fitted, you could opt for installation at a slightly later date (the following week perhaps) and get the benefit of a price reduction. BOXT says that these discounts can be up to £150 if customers are in a position to hold off for their date of installation.

Having chosen the date, I got details of the arrival time of the engineer and who it would be, and then proceeded to payment.

Pre-installation

I quickly received confirmation of my booking, what I had ordered and when the installation was booked for. The email also advised me to download the BOXT app so that I could manage my booking, as well as upload the necessary photos of my current boiler and its location, which would be reviewed by the in-house engineers before installation.

BOXT explains that this is so its team can review your photos against your boiler order, “to make sure you have selected the perfect boiler for your home and avoid any surprises on your installation day.”

You’ll need to allow yourself a little bit of time to take the photos and upload them, especially if you are trying to meet the 3pm cut-off time for a next-day install.

Just like the website, the app is really easy to use and offered clear instructions on what photos were needed and, more importantly, what needed to be included in the image.

The required images included things like the current boiler location, the pipework above and below the boiler, the existing thermostat, the flue exit, the area around the flue and the gas meter. Uploading them was quick and easy, and once each section was ticked I received a notification that I would be contacted if there were any additional queries on my photos, but otherwise the installation was set to go ahead as scheduled.

Installation day

The engineer was confirmed to arrive between 7am and 10am and I was also told in advance that the boiler would be arriving by courier, and given a delivery window for that too.

My engineer arrived before 8am, which meant he was also here to accept delivery of the boiler and check everything. After showing the engineer where the boiler was, he did a quick check of the gas meter location and the thermostat before talking me through the process. He let me know that the gas and water would be turned off for a couple of hours, so I made sure to fill up the kettle and cook my porridge on the hob before he started!

He also explained it would take a few hours to remove the boiler and then fit the new one along with the new thermostat, so I had a clear idea of what would be involved. After that, I got on with my work in the other room and left him to it.

There were no problems with the install and everything was neatly fitted in place. Any mess was cleaned up and the kitchen didn't look any different to how it had done first thing in the morning.

Once everything was up and running, the engineer talked me through the boiler controls and showed me how to check the pressure in the system. He also fitted the Hive thermostat and set it up so I could operate the boiler from the thermostat, as well as the app.

The whole installation process was very efficient, professional and was completed without any issues.

BOXT boiler installation aftercare

After the boiler was fitted, paperwork such as the warranty, gas safety certificate and workmanship guarantee was uploaded to the app where I can view it. It also shows that the Building Regulations sign off will arrive via mail, six weeks after the installation (for free), or it gives you the option to download a copy from the Gas Safe website for a fee.

There's a copy of the final invoice in the app and a digital version of the boiler manual should you need to quickly find out some info. There's even a help section, with info such as Worcester Bosch boiler error codes and common heating questions so you can try and fix any simple issues yourself, should they arise.

Within the app you can also book a boiler service, report any boiler problems or book a boiler repair.

Should you use the BOXT boiler installation service?

Arranging to have work done to your home can often take longer than you might want, especially if you're stuck without heating and hot water due to a boiler breakdown. A shortage of tradespeople means getting something done in an emergency isn't always possible either. What's more, if you've moved house and don't yet have any contacts in the local area, then searching for a local heating engineer, checking out reviews and getting quotes for a new boiler can take a while.

With their quick, easy-to-use service and next-day installation offer, BOXT take away a great deal of that hassle for you. The company has an extensive range of products to choose from (more than you would be likely to get from your local heating engineer) and the entire process, from choosing the boiler to booking the installation and then having it fitted, went so smoothly that I wouldn't hesitate to recommend the service to friends and family. Communication was clear throughout the process, the engineer arrived on time and left everything in a clean and tidy state, plus the aftercare has been spot on too.

From looking at the reviews on the likes of Trustpilot, it would seem the majority of BOXT customers have had a similar experience. BOXT has an 'excellent' rating, with an average score of 4.8/5 and more than 50,000 reviews.

Although I didn't need to have my boiler replaced in an emergency, I can see how the BOXT service would make that situation a great deal less stressful too.

What I will say as one final point, however, is that my boiler replacement was relatively straightforward. I was replacing my boiler with a similar model, I wasn't moving my boiler to a new location and there were no issues with my heating system. It means I can't comment on how the service would be for a more complicated install, but I have no reason to doubt it would be any less of a success than mine was.

About this review and our reviewer

Beth Murton is the Editor of Homebuilding & Renovating. She has renovated two homes and in her current home she previously replaced the boiler and upgraded the heating system using a local heating engineer.

Products and services for this review were supplied at no cost, but we have not been paid to write this review. This is review of the BOXT service and installation, not of the boiler itself.

Living in a damp Victorian home, with a lounge right next to a downstairs bathroom, I had almost given up on ever having a dry, comfortable space.

I had tried cheap moisture absorbers that barely made a dent in the problem, but then I got the Duux Bora dehumidifier.

It quickly showed why it’s the best dehumidifier for managing heavy moisture, keeping the air fresh and the room comfortable in ways I hadn’t experienced before.

Intelligent moisture control with integrated hygrostat

The standout feature of the Duux Bora dehumidifier is its combination of powerful water absorption, integrated hygrostat, and efficient R290 refrigerant technology, which removes moisture effectively while being environmentally friendly.

My lounge regularly reached 70–80% humidity, well above the government's Housing Health and Safety Rating System's recommended 40–60%, and the Duux Bora dehumidifier reduced my humidity levels to below 60%.

Its 20L extraction capacity (although it also comes in 12L and 30L options) also ensures it can remove large amounts of moisture efficiently, while the hygrostat adjusts the operation so the room stays perfectly balanced without the need for me to constantly monitor it.

Laundry-drying mode & practical design

The laundry-drying mode is fantastic for drying robes and towels straight from the shower, preventing them from staying damp for hours.

The Duux Bora dehumidifier also comes with a continuous drain hose, allowing for uninterrupted operation during heavy moisture periods.

On top of that, the smooth rollers make it easy to move the unit from room to room whenever needed, adding convenience and flexibility to its high-capacity performance.

Low-maintenance filtration

Because the lounge sits next to a bathroom, odours and damp smells used to linger. The carbon filter in the Duux Bora dehumidifier freshens the air as it removes moisture, leaving the room cleaner and healthier.

Maintenance is simple: cleaning the Duux Bora dehumidifier is easy thanks to its smooth design, plus I only need to wash the filter every two weeks, and it only needs replacing once a year.

I tend to empty the 4L tank every morning if it’s been left running overnight, and then once again during the day. But the Duux Bora dehumidifier also includes a drainage hose, so I can run it into a sink or larger container for continuous draining, which saves me from having to empty the tank as often.

Smart app control & Indoor Climate View

The new Duux app allows me to operate the Duux Bora dehumidifier from anywhere in the world, set up to seven schedules, and track indoor air quality over time.

The Indoor Climate View shows real-time humidity levels in each room where the unit is used, based on readings collected whenever I move it.

The Duux Bora dehumidifier also integrates with Google Assistant and Amazon Alexa, making it easy to adjust settings remotely or hands-free.

Is the Duux Bora dehumidifier worth it?

The Duux Bora dehumidifier has been a game-changer for my damp Victorian lounge, but it’s worth noting other dehumidifiers can offer different advantages.

The Meaco 20L Low Energy dehumidifier includes a HEPA filter that captures dust and mould spores, providing stronger air-purifying performance than the Duux Bora dehumidifier.

The ProBreeze 20L Premium dehumidifier shares features with the Duux Bora dehumidifier, including a 20 L tank, laundry mode, and continuous drain hose, but it is noted for slightly lower running costs when compared at the highest settings.

While these models have their strengths, the Duux Bora dehumidifier stands out for its smart hygrostat, app control, sleek design, portability, and overall convenience.

If you see any signs you might need a dehumidifier then don't hesitate like I did and get the best all-round solution for comfort, moisture control, and healthier air whilst it's still on offer.

Keeping my home secure is a top priority, which is why I was keen to try one of the best security cameras to enhance my safety setup and give me peace of mind.

These devices are expensive as it is, and I've often been put off by the monthly subscription fees that most models require. That’s why it was refreshing to see that the Toucan Wireless Security Camera S4 doesn’t have one and comes with a relatively affordable price tag.

After reading that this model was wireless (a.k.a. no messy cables), had motion detection, and offered security alerts, I was eager to give it a go. To find out whether it lived up to these claims – and whether it's worth the investment – keep on reading.

Specifications

In terms of safety features, the Toucan Wireless Security Camera S4 ticks all my boxes, including night vision, smart lighting, motion detection and alerts, two-way talk, a siren alarm, and emergency calling. It can also be connected to your Google Home or Alexa devices.

Here's a breakdown of the specs:

First impressions of the Toucan Wireless Security Camera S4

I was impressed with the Toucan Wireless Security Camera S4 from the get-go – it was well packaged and had a high-quality appearance and feel.

Apart from a screwdriver for mounting, the device came with everything I needed to get started: the camera itself, a USB-C charging cable, three wall anchors, three mounting screws, a mount, and a printed user manual. You can also find the instructions online if you prefer, as well as helpful videos on Toucan's YouTube channel.

Since the camera is controlled via your phone, I also had to download the free Toucan app, but everything was very straightforward and easy to set up. I like how I can access the footage with a single tap, and that it’s all stored in the cloud so I don’t have to worry about backing up an SD card.

Setting up the Toucan Wireless Security Camera S4

If you’re a tech-phobe and hate the idea of reading through pages and pages of instructions, you’re going to love how simple this wireless home security camera is to install. It took no longer than 10 minutes to get it up and running, following these simple steps:

1. Install the app

• Download the Toucan app and set up your account.
• Tap the “+” button on the dashboard.
• Press the “SET” button on your camera and hold it until the LED light blinks.
• Follow the instructions in the app to connect to your camera.

2. Charge the camera

• Open the plug cover and insert the charging cable.
• When the LED turns a solid blue, the device is fully charged.

3. Mount the camera

• Mark the holes on your wall where you want the camera to go.
• Drill the holes and insert the wall anchors.
• Attach the mount using the screws.
• Attach the camera, twisting the tightening collar and ring.
• Tighten the mount.

Using the Toucan Wireless Security Camera S4

I've been testing this camera for months and have been impressed with its user-friendly design and reassuring security features.

I'm alerted whenever someone walks past the flat, which gives me peace of mind and helps me feel safe. You can even customise the trigger zone so you don’t get unwanted alerts from high-traffic areas – perfect for people who live on busy streets and only want specific notifications. If you don’t want to receive any alerts at all, you can also turn them off manually.

Another handy feature is the two-way talk, which lets you speak to someone at the door via a built-in microphone and speaker. Not only is this great from a security perspective, but it’s also incredibly useful if you have a delivery and need to give the driver instructions on where to leave your parcel.

However, if you have someone more menacing than a postie at your door, you can set a pre-recorded message or alarm to warn them that someone’s watching – all controlled from your phone, anywhere and at any time.

The 1440p video resolution isn’t outstanding, but it does the job for what I need and offers a 140° field of view. The camera also includes night vision which, again, isn’t the best quality and may not pick up all facial features, but I wouldn’t necessarily choose a different model because of this. However, I would avoid placing a security light behind or next to it, as this reduced the night-vision clarity for me.

Thanks to the IP56 weather-resistant design, you don’t have to worry about it getting too wet or too cold in your garden, and mine has held up well in all weather conditions. I hate the look of messy cables, so I was really happy that this camera is wireless (which also made installation easier).

While battery life will vary depending on usage, mine averages about a month per charge, and it only takes a couple of hours to power it back up again.

One of my favourite things about this camera is that it’s subscription-free – something I was particularly impressed with given its already affordable price. You can only review footage from the past 24 hours, but you do have the option to download clips to your phone so you can keep them forever.

Final verdict

If you’re looking for an affordable – yet reliable – security camera that helps you feel safe at home, I’d highly recommend the Toucan S4. It might not have the sharpest night vision, and you’ll need to remember to charge it, but these are minor drawbacks considering its security features and budget-friendly price.

It’s easy to use, quick to set up, and doesn’t require a costly subscription plan like most other security cameras. Measuring just 20 cm with a simple white-and-black design, I like how it looks on my wall, and the weather resistance makes it practical to use year-round.

If you buy multiple cameras, you can sync them together and monitor different parts of your property (inside or out) at the same time. Or, if you have an Alexa or Google Home, it integrates well with an existing home security system.

Before setting up this device, it’s worth reading up on where to place a security camera to make the most of your setup.

I’m always excited when I get a new power tool; I feel like a kid at Christmas. I can’t wait to take it out of the box and start working. Of course, I need to be more restrained when testing a product, but my enthusiasm stays the same.

The latest addition to my collection is the Black & Decker 18V Brushless Angle Grinder (available from Argos). Having previous experience with Black + Decker tools, I expected this device to be reliable. Aimed at DIYers, the set included everything I needed to start cleaning, cutting, and removing rust. But, as with all cordless power tools, how would the battery life hold up, and how quickly would it recharge? Time to find out.

Specs and features

• Battery voltage: 18v
• Battery type: Lithium Ion
• Motor: Brushless
• Max speed: 7600rpm
• Disc size: 115mm
• Weight: 3.6kg
• Guarantee: Two years
• Features: Soft grip handle, side handle, spindle lock, protective guard
• In the box: 1 x 2.0Ah Battery, 1 x Charger, 3 x 115mm cutting discs, soft bag, and a two-pin spanner

BUY THE BLACK + DECKER 18V BRUSHLESS ANGLE GRINDER FROM TOOLSTATION TODAY

Unboxing and first impressions

A good first impression is always positive, and straight out of the box, there was a crisp, clean, and hefty angle grinder. It felt like a sturdy piece of equipment. Accompanying the angle grinder was a handle, three cutting discs – strangely, two together and one separate in the box. These discs were all the same size –115mm x 65mm x 22.23mm – and were specifically designed for working with metal. It’s worth noting that a 115mm angle grinder sits at the smaller end of the market, making it a general all-rounder for DIYers. Larger 150mm/230mm grinders are more suitable for heavy-duty tasks.

Included was a two-pin lock-nut spanner – needed to attach and remove the cutting disc – a 2.0 Ah battery, a small, lightweight charger, and a soft carry bag. More about the battery later.

The handle was unattached but could be mounted on either the left or right side of the angle grinder, making it ideal for both right and left-handed users. Something DIYers might not spot immediately (I didn’t) is that the lock-nut spanner is neatly tucked away in the handle. A smart choice? We weren't so sure, the spanner could have been packed separately in the box and labelled more obviously to avoid any confusion.

Once I found it, it was easy to remove, use and replace. How would I describe the spanner? Functional rather than fancy, but you can buy an adjustable angle grinder spanner – with a rubber-covered handle for extra grip and comfort – for less than a fiver. I personally have this xdg Angle Grinder Adjustable Spanner from Amazon, which does a good job.

Setting up angle grinder

There’s not a lot to do to set up the Black & Decker 18V Brushless Angle Grinder. Fit the side handle to your preferred side – left or right –, slip out the lock spanner, fit a cutting disc and insert the battery.

Fitting the cutting disc wasn’t as straightforward as I'd hoped. The spindle lock button needs to be fully depressed to engage (which I thought was the case the first few times, but it wasn’t), and you need to wiggle the disc to lock it. There’s a knack to fitting the disc, but it gets easier the more you do it. Locking the flange nut keeps the disc in place. This can be reversed for thinner discs.

There’s an adjustable guard that is quick and simple and move into position. A quick-release lever makes it easy to move from the default grinding position to a cutting position. Simply release the lever, move the guard and close the lever. Job done. It’s worth noting that you might need a larger guard (not supplied) if using a wire brush wheel. Once everything’s sorted, you simply need to slip in the battery and you're ready for action.

How well did the Black & Decker 18V Brushless Angle Grinder work

To test the Black & Decker 18V Brushless Angle Grinder, we started with the three identical discs supplied. They are specifically designed for use on metal, which influenced how I initially used the angle grinder.

I began by cleaning a few rusty tools that needed a refresh, then removing old paint from a few metal posts that needed repair. All went well, and an easy-to-use locking on/off switch kicked the angle grinder into life. The grip was secure and the vibration was acceptable, but – not unexpectedly – in action, it was noisy, so you will definitely need earplugs or ear defenders (like these 3M PELTOR Optime earmuffs from Amazon).

Sparks were all part of the process, and the guard did a good job of redirecting them away from me. But, I still used googles and gloves (I’m a very sensible man nowadays, thanks to previous experiences). The supplied discs performed well. I only needed to use one to clean four or five tools and four or five metal posts, and it was still doing a good job.

The next test was removing mortar for a repointing project I’m working on and cutting ceramic floor tiles. I had to purchase suitable stone/masonry discs, which are typically thinner than metal discs. I simply flipped the fixing flange for a tight fit. The grinder powered through the tiles and mortar, no problem, but not for much longer than 20 minutes before it was time for a charge.

How was the battery life?

As with any cordless power tool, battery and charging times are a big deal, and the Black & Decker 18V Brushless Angle Grinder didn’t hit the heady heights we might have hoped. The angle grinder comes with a 2.0Ah Battery and a small, lightweight 1A Charger. Both are adequate for small DIY tasks, but we would have liked to see a larger-capacity battery and a faster charger. I’m sure this would increase the RRP, but it would definitely be worth it.

Straight out of the box, the battery took three hours to reach full capacity. Ideally, you want to charge overnight. Don’t worry, the charger can be left connected even after it's fully charged. Charging times after this were less, but still took hours rather than minutes.

It has a single LED that flashes or stays on, depending on whether it's fully charged or not. A quartet of easy-to-understand icons tell you what the LED status means. A few notable charger features we liked were charging suspension when the battery is excessively hot or cold, and diagnostics to check whether the battery is weak or damaged.

Fully charged, the battery lasts 20-30 minutes, depending on how it's used, but it was still disappointing. Definitely consider investing in a larger-capacity battery and keep a spare on hand so you can keep a job going uninterrupted.

Final verdict

If you want to use the Black & Decker 18V Brushless Angle Grinder straight out of the box, you can remove rust from tools or cut through metal using the included discs. However, for other common tasks such as removing mortar, cutting tiles, or sanding and polishing, you will need to purchase discs designed for those specific jobs.

This isn’t a major issue, especially if you have lots of metalwork to tackle. But since Black + Decker supplies three discs with the grinder, I would have preferred a variety, such as a masonry-cutting disc, particularly since I was working on a repointing project.

However, my main concern was the battery and charger. They worked well when fully charged, but the charging times were lengthy and the battery life shorter than expected. An issue compounded by the lack of a spare battery. A higher capacity battery or a spare would have been a nice addition.

However, the Black & Decker 18V Brushless Angle Grinder is aimed at DIYers, not professionals, so the short working time won’t be such a big issue. But to get the most out of the angle grinder, I highly recommend investing in an extra battery like this 3.0Ah LBXR20 Li-ion Replacement for Black and Decker 18V Battery from Amazon for continuous use

I'll admit to feeling sceptical about trying the Philips OneUp 5000 Series Electric Mop, wondering if it was an indulgence I just didn't need. It falls on the side of expensive, and it wasn't something I'd ever thought of purchasing.

But, with my love of a clean home ever present, the fact the clean and dirty water don't mix in the mop system started to tempt me. It's always been my biggest bugbear when mopping floors, but lugging around two buckets of water (one clean and one for rinsing) is never going to be a practical solution.

So, with my reservations front of mind, I took delivery of the Philips OneUp 5000 Series Electric Mop with interest. Would it see me popping on my cleaning crown with pride, or make me feel it was just an expensive cleaning accessory I didn't need?

What are the key features of the Philips OneUp 5000 Series Electric Mop?

The Philips OneUp 5000 Series Electric Mop has a number of features to consider if you are weighing it up against other products on the market.

As well as including one cartridge of concentrated cleaning solution, one mop pad and a charging lead, it has the following specification:

• Cordless
• 70 minute battery run time
• 2 wetness settings
• 281 ml clean water tank
• 178 ml dirty water tank
• Empty weight 1.9kg
• Dimension: 35 x 12 x 140 cm

What were my first impressions of the mop?

My first thoughts when unpacking the Philips OneUp 5000 Series Electric Mop were ones of slight scepticism. The water containers were very small and I felt there was no way they could hold enough water to clean all my flooring in one go.

That aside, there was very little to dislike about the product. It's a clean and simple design in a lovely shade of blue. It only has a few components which always gets a big tick from me – particularly as I'd already cleaned vacuumed the floors and wanted to use the mop immediately.

So, despite my worries (which would only be either proved or disproved once in use) on the whole, there really was nothing overly negative to say. A great first impression.

Is setting up and using the Philips OneUp 5000 Series Electric Mop difficult?

As mentioned, there are only a few parts that need assembling on the Philips OneUP 5000 Series Electric Mop. First up is the handle which easily slots into the main body of the mop and is secured in place with one screw.

Then, the cleaning solution cartridge is secured to the head of the clean water tank with a simple twist and click into place. I'll admit I wasn't expecting it to come with cleaning solution, and had assumed I'd need to add my own, or use a spray on floor solution.

One cartridge contains 40 doses and replacement cartridges are available on Amazon for £16.99. While this may seem a lot, it equates to around 42p per use. Depending on which type of floor cleaning solution you buy, this may or may not be comparable. But either way, I like the fact it's a dosed delivery as I know I'm personally guilty of pouring more cleaning product than I need to into a bucket when mopping.

Having a dispensed dose can only mean I don't waste or use more than is necessary.

Once you've attached the cartridge, you then fill the top water container with clean water, and press the button on the top to dispense one dose of solution. Pop the container back into the mop body, make sure the dirty water tank is in place too, and there's only one more step until you're ready to press the start button.

Once you're ready to mop, the final step is to wet the mop head under a tap and then reattach it to the base of the mop.

According to the instructions, once you've finished mopping, you can wash it in the washing machine, ready for the next use. It's recommended to replace it once every 6 months and a pack of two replacement pads can easily be purchased from the Philips website for £34.99.

How did I use the Philips OneUP 5000 Series Electric Mop?

It's entirely accurate to say that using the mop is as simple as the set-up. There are just two buttons. One which controls the wetness settings, and the other to turn it on and off. I opted for the lower wetness setting as there were no obvious stains or debris to remove.

An LED display shows clearly how much battery power you have, and it's a case of press and go. With the mop head already wet, it simply glides across the floor.

The way the mop works is that it dispenses the clean water containing the cleaning solution onto the floor via the mop pad. It then then sucks up the dirty water into a separate container. The two never mix, meaning only clean water touches your floor – unlike a traditional mop where once you've mopped one section, you have no choice other than to put the dirty mop back into the clean water, rinse and repeat.

Instantly it felt like I was cleaning more deeply, and the 360° angled head meant it was easy to reach under chairs, tables and sofas without having to move too much furniture.

In terms of where I cleaned, I used it on bathroom floors, both of which are tiled, and also on the luxury vinyl flooring in my open plan kitchen, dining and living room and then on the wooden stairs leading to the front door.

The mop head was easy to move across all the different surfaces, and there are two things worth noting that are related to time.

Firstly, there's no doubt that it took a fraction of the time to mop the floors than it normally takes me. Secondly, the claims of a 50% quicker drying time are definitely true.

It can often take at least 30 minutes for the floors to dry fully once I've mopped. Using the Philips OneUP 5000 Series Electric Mop it was probably less than 10 minutes before they were clean and ready to walk on again.

And of course, there's also the matter of how much dirt the mop cleaned. It was more than I'd imagined it would be, to the point where I'm really not happy sharing this picture of the dirty water container! However, in the interests of editorial content it's featured below.

But what really deserves space on the page is how little water it has taken to clean my floors. Normally I'd have at least one, if not two mop buckets to discard. With the Philips OneUP 5000 Series Electric Mop, it's reduced to one small container.

In fact the mop specifications say that one container of clean water will clean up to 50m of floor and offer a 90% water saving. Based on my experience, I'd say those numbers are very accurate indeed.

Did the mop convert me or do I still think it's too much of an indulgence?

At the risk of repeating myself, from ease of set up, speed of use, fast drying times and eco-friendly low water consumption, there's very little I didn't like about the Philips OneUP 5000 Series Electric Mop.

While it of course costs more than a normal mop and bucket, and you have to buy branded replacements such as cleaning solution and mop pads to use with it, it's surprised me just how good this product is.

I was genuinely sceptical before I started testing it, feeling it would undoubtedly work, but certainly not see me waxing lyrical in our morning meeting about just how great it was. Normally the last stage of mopping sees me moaning at the fact the cleaning still isn't finished, but since using the mop, it now feels like the best part of it, knowing just how quick it will be, and just how clean my floors will look at the end.

While I don't have a large home, as it cleans the floors quickly, I barely came close to using much of the battery. Plus, with a full charge lasting 70 minutes, it should easily be sufficient for most homes, even those with larger expanses of hard flooring.

If I had any minor niggles at all, it would be that if you like a strong scent when mopping floors, this cleaning solution doesn't offer it. But as I know from the results shown when testing the Molekule Air Pro, this isn't a bad thing. Cleaning products cause a big spike in poor air quality, making the pet and family friendly Philips OneUP 5000 Series Electric Mop cleaning solution undoubtedly better for use inside my home.

Do I still consider it a luxury rather than must-have item? It's a premium priced product, so I guess you could argue it's not accessible to everyone, but is it worth it? For efficiency, results and water saving quality, then yes, it definitely is.

I've had video entry systems in the past, but never a standalone video doorbell. And, since moving to live on a relatively busy high street, I've avoided installing one for fear of late night unwanted notifications.

But, as I live in a first floor apartment and need to run downstairs every time the doorbell rings, when the EZVIZ EP3X Pro dual camera video doorbell became available for review, I decided it was time to bite the bullet and give it a go.

With claims of easy installation, wireless connection (even though my router is on the first floor) and a solar powered rechargeable battery, would installing it mean an easier life or not, and would it be the best video doorbell for me?

Specifications

It's important to outline the specifications of the EZVIZ EP3X Pro dual camera video doorbell, as these are usually one of the main deciding factors for homeowners considering which to purchase. In my situation, a wireless video doorbell without a monthly subscription plan were top of my list.

The EZVIZ EP3X Pro offers the following:

• Dual cameras comprising a 2K forward-facing lens with a wide 162° field of view and a 1080p downward-facing lens
• Smart human motion and package detection
• Two-way-talk feature with voice changer function for improved privacy and protection
• Colour night vision making it easy to see who is at the door, even when there is no outdoor lighting
• Built-in LED light on bell
• Option to hardwire or run the bell using the rechargeable battery that can be connected to a solar panel, or removed and charged via USB
• Zero cost storage as it is embedded with a 32 GB eMMC storage capacity meaning it can store up to 6 months of video history (based on the recording of 10 minutes of activities every day)

First impressions and set-up

The EZVIZ EP3X Pro dual camera video doorbell arrived in a relatively small box, with two boxes contained within. A good start considering I wanted something I could set up quickly to avoid the sudden downpours we keep having.

Unpacking the boxes thankfully didn't contain any major surprises, although the one surprise was the lack of a full instruction manual. Instead, a small booklet asks you to scan a QR code to view the full instructions online.

I understand that this is a piece of home security equipment that requires a basic understanding of tech in order to install it, but there's still something to be said for having printed instructions to hand.

Especially as you have to flit between the instructions on screen (which are slightly blurred) and the Ezviz app during set up. The camera is designed to be used with your phone, so having to move between screens wasn't overly practical.

But, that aside, on first sight it's a good, solid looking video camera doorbell that I feel looks more expensive than it actually is. This was confirmed when one visitor commented how good it looked, and that she felt it must have a good camera because of this reason.

Setting up the EZVIZ EP3X Pro dual camera video doorbell

Set up of the EZVIZ EP3X Pro involves four stages:

1. Install the app
2. Power on the doorbell
3. Connect the doorbell to the app
4. Install the doorbell and solar panel if required

Installing the app, powering the doorbell and connecting the doorbell to the app are simple steps. Although it is worth noting that you need to make sure the doorbell has power before you connect it to the app. Unfortunately it's not until you work your way through the instructions that this becomes apparent. It does come with a cable to charge it, but could take around 4.5 hours to fully charge.

Thankfully, mine already had plenty of battery life left, so I was able to proceed without delay.

You'll need to scan the QR code on the doorbell to connect it to your Wi-Fi router, and then start using the app to connect it (have your password ready). You're then ready to install it following the most appropriate instructions for your property.

I opted to connect my doorbell to the solar panel so that the battery is constantly being charged. This involves loosening screws on the back of the doorbell and connecting a cable that comes out of the solar panel. It's not tricky, and doesn't mean you have to try and install it holding both bits. Each part has its own removable back panel, and it's this that you fit to the wall or door frame.

The solar panel needs to sit either above or to either side of the doorbell, again depending on where you will be fitting it. In my case, I was installing the doorbell on a wooden door frame rather than the wall next to the door, so opted to fit the solar panel above.

Although the back plates come with adhesive fixings, they also have drill guides if you are fitting them using the screws and rawl plugs provided. I had the easy job of just needing to screw the plates into a wooden door frame.

Once the plates are in place, you need to make sure the wire from the solar panel to the doorbell is guided through the open slots, so that the panel and doorbell can then be clicked into place on the backplate. It was a little trickier than I expected, but really not that difficult.

And, if you're worried the fact it clicks on and off means that the doorbell might get taken, it has a tamper setting so if it is removed, it will sound an alarm and notify you.

Once you've completed installation, you then have the option of installing a wireless chime in the house, so that even if the doorbell rings and you don't have your phone to hand, you can still hear that there is someone at the door. A handy feature if there are family members who don't have access to the app. As an aside, you can add family members to the app and share the device with them so that they can answer the doorbell if you're not at home.

You can choose the ring tone and the volume, and follow the same process as the doorbell when adding it as a product on the app. Scan a QR code and connect it to your wireless network.

Using the EZVIZ EP3X Pro dual camera video doorbell

As soon as the doorbell was fitted, it was up and running. Notifications on the app popped through as people walked past, and testing that it worked was simple.

When someone rings the doorbell, on my mobile it shows as a call coming through from the front door (you have the option to name the doorbell), you answer and immediately are connected to the camera.

The pictures are very clear and the wide angle shows a good stretch of the street. The camera pointing downwards would also be great if you have a front porch where parcels can be left.

Audio is clear both ways, despite the traffic noise, and once I'd turned off notifications so it wasn't constantly pinging on my phone, it's fair to say it's been a breeze to use. An added bonus is that can also turn down the level of detections so that it's not storing every single person that walks by – less of a problem in some homes, but essential for me when I live on a high street.

'Events' as the recordings are called are shown as images in the app and stored until you choose otherwise. It's easy to delete the events each day if you don't need them, plus you can save them as screenshots if you do need them for any reason.

There's also a live view function that is handy if you hear noises and want to check if there is anyone at the door that shouldn't be. This is also clear day or night, thanks to the colour night vision.

In terms of battery length, you can click on the battery icon and it shows you if the solar panel is charging. Despite recent poor weather, mine has continued to charge each day, plus there are power saving modes if you want to lower battery usage. As it gets darker through the winter, it will be interesting to see how much the battery tops up each day.

Final verdict

Overall, while set up wasn't quite as simple as plug and play, and the app itself isn't the most sophisticated or user-friendly I've seen, I've been more than happy with the performance of the EZVIZ EP3X Pro dual camera video doorbell so far.

My biggest concerns were that it wouldn't reach the wireless network as it it's one floor down. I was also worried that as I live on a busy street, I'd be inundated with unnecessary notifications and the camera and audio wouldn't be clear at all hours of the day.

However, the connection to my wireless network has remained constant and stable, the ability to lower notifications and completely disable them suits my needs well and sound and audio are excellent on both counts. In all honesty, my concerns have been answered across the board, and I've been left wondering why I've resisted getting a video doorbell for so long.

In terms of appearance, it also has a more solid look and appearance than some video doorbells. It looks like a video entry system rather than a doorbell, and I think this could be an advantage in terms of deterring anyone thinking of trying to gain entry.

And while you'd think on a main high street I'd be less at risk, it's not always the case. I had scaffolding up recently and on two occasions people climbed it late at night, meaning they were right outside my bedroom window. Needless to say I persuaded them to get down pretty quickly, but wasn't able to capture a picture of them. Had the doorbell been in place, they would have been caught on screen.

I also like the fact that if you're keen on setting up a smart home system, Ezvizhas a wide range of other products you could add into the system. Ranging from full security systems through to radiator valves and robot vacuums, you have plenty of options. And, if you want to integrate it into third party systems such as Amazon Alexa, this is also possible too.

Is this the best video doorbell without subscription to rival the Eufy Security Video Doorbell E340 Dual Camera that Laura Crombie, Homebuilding & Renovating's Brand Director tested?

In my opinion, yes. It's solid, reliable, can be used as part of a larger wireless home security system and will clearly suit all homes, from larger detached properties through to city-based abodes.

I'm not a fan of the colder seasons and never will be. Give me the heat of the summer any day of the week. But, even though I hate the cold, when it comes to switching my heating on, rising energy bills mean I'm loathe to flick the switch until it's absolutely necessary.

Add into the mix the fact I work from home and live in a Grade II listed apartment with single glazed windows, and it becomes a battle of extra layers and jumpers vs paying more to be warm, as soon as the temperature drops outside.

So when I was offered the chance to review the Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater 714S I was intrigued enough to give it a blast. Having tried oil filled radiators and fan heaters in the past I wasn't convinced it would do the trick, but ended up being pleasantly surprised by the results. In fact I liked it so much I've probably convinced some of the other HBR team to try it out too.

Heater specification

Petite but powerful are the two words that spring to mind when looking at the specification for the Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater 714S. Suitable for use around the home (excluding bathrooms and outdoors), its main features are:

• Product dimensions: 28×18×31.5cm
• Product weight: 2.93kg
• Number of speeds: 6
• Adjustable speed
• Adjustable temperature
• Adjustable tilt head
• Child Lock
• Digital display
• Auto shutoff
• 3D whole room heating with vertical and horizontal oscillation
• 2000W Hyperamics™ 2s instant heat
• 8-layer safety protection
• HyperSilent™ 34 dB whisper-quiet
• App controllable from anywhere

First impressions

The Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater arrived neatly boxed and on first impressions looks much like a floor fan you'd use to cool a room in summer. Turns out you can in fact use it for that, so in theory, this is a 2-in-1 product you can use year round. Handy when air conditioning and fans are becoming a must with climate change.

I tested the MeacoFan Sefte 10" Pedestal Air Circulator in a heatwave to see if I could sleep with it in a bedroom, and the answer was yes. Given the whisper quiet function of the Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater 714S, I suspect the answer would be much the same were I testing it in the summer as a fan.

Unpacking it and setting it up was simple. While it comes with an app, which I'll talk about shortly, you can also simply plug and play using the touch panel control or the remote control. Perfect if the heater arrives on a particularly chilly day and you want to set it to work straight away.

There are three main modes – Power Heat, Eco and Fan Only. Eco mode will give you the most efficient usage as once the room has reached a set temperature, the unit will switch off and only turn back on once the room temperature changes.

You can also adjust the degrees at which the Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater oscillates, which could be handy if you were using it in a small home office and wanted the heat directed at you for more of the time.

As first impressions go however, it had a clean, contemporary and stylish design. It comes in either black or white, (I've been testing the white) and there really is nothing to dislike about the way it looks. And, if I were to rate whether I felt it was easy to use, I'd say yes. The instructions and controls aren't overly complicated, with options for those who are tech savvy, and those that are less so.

But, are my first impressions right and is it easy to use?

Using the Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater 714s

As mentioned, there's a choice of three control options – touch panel, remote control and app, and these are all explained in the simple Quick Start Guide, or in more detail in the small, but perfectly succinct instruction manual.

I started by testing the touch panel. It has 6 main buttons with some having more than one function. However, one initial downside of the heater touch panel is that when the heater is in use, it's usually going to be at floor level. While the heater is light, and small enough to place on a surface, as heat rises, and the heater oscillates 60° vertically and 90° horizontally, placing it on the floor will give you the best reach.

So, if you have misplaced the remote for any reason, you would find yourself crouching on the floor to adjust the settings. It's light enough to lift up and place on a surface to adjust, but nonetheless it could temper your opinion of it if you don't want to use the remote or app.

The remote has the same buttons as the control panel making it easy to understand what button does what. Again, nothing really negative to comment about the remote as it's simple, white and uncomplicated to use once you've checked the quick start guide.

However, if you're looking for full functionality and are a fan of smart home devices which are usually controlled via an app, the Dreo app is for you. In fact I was surprised at how quick and easy it was to set the app up and start using it to control the heater.

I downloaded the app, connected it to my bluetooth and wi-fi, the app then searched and found the heater on the network. It's also worth bearing in mind I was sat upstairs doing this but the heater was downstairs. It gives you option to name the priduct, choose its location and then set it up to work with other smart home apps that are voice activated, such as Alexa and Siri.

However, what I also like about the app is that it gives you the ability to set schedules for the heater, meaning you can warm a room before you even enter it. And, as long as you've set the 'on' schedule to run usingEco mode and specified your temperature, you can be confident that if it's unseasonably warm one day, the heater simply won't switch on.

As I've been testing the heater in the living room, I've set it to come on in the mornings and switch off 30 minutes later. While it's not on for the full 30 minutes (it heats the room jup up in around 5-10 minutes maximum at the time of writing, and switches off once it reaches that heat), I've selected an off time I don't have to worry about it running when there's no-one in the room during the day.

If you are concerned about usage, the app shows you how often it is running so you can also make any minor scheduling tweaks as required.

Were my first impressions correct? I'd have to say yes. There are really no complicated switches, buttons or instructions. It heats quickly and if you want it to just be a product you plug in and switch on and switch off as required, it can be. Or, if you prefer to set it up and leave it alone, you can do that too.

Final verdict

While using the Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater 714S is, without any doubt, in the easy-to-use category, it's impossible to come to a final verdict without mentioning cost. Particularly given I've said I'd use it over an oil-filled radiator, but have also said energy bills are an issue. Do the maths and there's no escaping the fact this heater is more expensive than oil filled radiator running costs, if you were to run it for a long period of time.

At current energy prices as of October 2025, as this heater is 2000W it would cost around 53p per hour to run. However, given how quickly it gets to work, the reality of running it for that long at any one point is unlikely.

So, what are the main reasons for me preferring it to an oil filled radiator?

One reason is portability. While oil filled radiators are such as the De'Longhi Dragon 4 TRD40820T Oil Filled Radiator from Amazon aren't particularly bulky and have wheels, they are still cumbersome enough to make moving them around more difficult. And, if you wanted to move them to a different floor, you would need to be strong enough to carry them up or down stairs.

The Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater 714S on the other hand is light, portable, has a good length power lead and could be moved around your home, as you change location, thus saving you money in the long run as you wouldn't need to buy as many individual units.

Secondly, while some oil filled radiators have vents that blow heat out, the heat from a radiator is best when you're closer to it, making it more limited as to where you can place it. Plus, that direct heat can get too hot, so you switch if off meaning both you and the room will drop in temperature.

The Dreo Smart Whole Room Heater 714S blows the heat around a far larger space, removing any immediate chill, and creating a better overall ambient temperature in a quicker space of time. My apartment living room has three big sash windows and yet even in this relatively uninsulated space, I've not needed to switch it back on again once the room has warmed up.

As the winter progresses, this may change, but then I'll mainly be using the heater in my bedroom which doubles as my home office. I'm confident that with the bedroom door closed, and the heater on the eco setting, it will provide the occasional burst of heat to my working environment and prevent me from needing to have the central heating on when there's only one person at home. In the long run, there's no doubt that will be more cost effective than heating the whole apartment all day.

And finally there's the issue of value for money. This fan doesn't have just one function, it has two. In the summer it can be used in fan mode to circulate air around. No, it's not a portable air conditioner, but as long as you've followed the tips for keeping a room cool, it will help keep you cool too. Less expenditure, less loft storage needed to place out of season items and again, it's light enough to move around and cool different areas of your home easily and efficiently.

The recent heatwaves and sleepless nights have finally tipped me over the edge and made me consider getting a fan for our bedroom. I've previously been put off as I'm such a light sleeper that the slightest noise can wake me up, but a fan that promised to cool our room with less than a whisper of noise was something I was happy to put to the test.

The new Duux Whisper Flex 2 fan (available from Amazon) is endorsed by Quiet Mark, meaning it meets high standards for its low noise levels. Duux claims it comes in at only 13 decibels on the lowest fan settings, which is less than a whisper apparently as that measures around 30 decibels.

Having tried cheaper desk fans in the past and been disappointed by how noisy they were, I was keen to see if the Duux Whisper Flex 2 would make it onto our list of the best air cooling fans. More importantly though, would it save me from restless, sweaty nights in a heatwave?

Unboxing and setting up the fan

The fan arrived in a relatively compact package that was lightweight and easy for me to pick up. Once opened, I could see the different fan components were neatly packaged inside and would need assembling.

There were seven different packages within the box, and I was pleased to see that all of the packaging can be recycled, including the bags that hold the individual components as these can be composted.

There was also a small booklet with diagrams on how to assemble the fan. I think the instructions could have been slightly clearer and bigger, but then I'm never a fan of assembling anything ( I typically delegate that to my husband), so other people may find the instructions super easy to follow.

The first thing that threw me was that it showed you had to insert a battery pack in the base, but there was no battery included in the box. A quick look on the website and I realised this is an additional extra and only required if you want to use the fan without a mains power supply, so not essential for me.

Once I'd sat down and worked out how to put it together from the images, it was relatively easy to assemble. The first column should slot neatly into the base, followed by the second one with the fan head on top.

At first I couldn't get them to slot in, but soon realised that each column features one wide prong and one narrower one, so you have to make sure you have each column lined up correctly with the right-sized hole. Once I'd turned the column 180 degrees, it slotted in perfectly.

One thing to note is you will need to have a screwdriver to unscrew the main fan casing so you can insert the blades and it's a bit fiddly to do it.

All in, however, it probably only took around 15 minutes to fully assemble everything, although I needed a second pair of hands to hold the fan steady while I slotted the casing back into place and tightened the small screw that keeps it firmly closed.

The last thing you need to do is insert the power cable in the base, plug it in and you're good to go.

First impressions

I have to say I was pleasantly surprised by the Whisper Flex 2's stylish looks. The sleek base with its touch-activated LED display feels super modern, while the off-white finish (this is the Stone colourway) will suit any room scheme, although it's also available in black and grey if you prefer a different colour.

The remote control is compact, easy to use and has a smart matt finish, although if I was being super picky I would have preferred it to be in white rather than black to match the fan.

The LED display on the base of the Whisper Flex 2 is easy to understand and I had no problem switching on the fan and activating the different modes from there or by using the remote control.

It also has a sturdy handle at the back of the fan that makes it easy to carry from room to room, so you can use it where and when you need it most to help keep your house cool.

It's certainly a step up from pedestal fans I've used and seen in the past, and although it perhaps doesn't have the wow factor of bladeless tower fans from the likes of Dyson or Shark, it's cheaper and still packs a punch in the style stakes.

Just like the similarly priced MeacoFan Sefte 10" Pedestal Air Circulator that we've also reviewed for Homebuilding & Renovating, it's part of a new breed of pedestal fans that are sleeker and more style conscious.

Duxx Whisper Flex 2 specifications

The Whisper Flex 2 comes with a whole host of benefits:

• Super-quiet noise levels from 13dB – 55dB (depending on the setting you use)
• Two-year guarantee
• Vertical and horizontal oscillation
• 30 speed settings
• Remote control
• Compatible with Google Assistant and Amazon Alexa
• Timer function
• Night mode
• 15m range
• Adjustable height
• Child safety lock
• Air flow per hour of 1,750 m³
• Weighs 4.2kg

Using the Duux Whisper Flex 2 fan in my home

We haven't got air conditioning anywhere in our home, so the first place I was keen to try the fan was in my bedroom. I hate sleeping in a hot bedroom, so summer and heatwaves are always tricky when it comes to me getting a good night's sleep. I have the windows open at night whatever the time of year and I'm never happier than when our room is like an ice box in winter and I get to snuggle up under the duvet!

Whether it's summer or winter, I always seem to find the room far hotter than my husband does, and when you add perimenopausal hot flushes into the equation as well, I often feel like I'm sleeping in a sauna. I've lost track of the number of times I've woken up in the night feeling too hot and then struggle to get back to sleep.

The first night I used the fan in our room the daytime temperature had been in the mid-20s so our bedroom was still feeling warm by the time I went to bed. I set the fan up on my side of the bed near to the window with the hope that it would help to boost our ventilation by drawing cooler night air into the room as well.

Using the remote I set it on the night mode so it was a lower, quieter setting. Having it in this mode also means any beeps are eliminated if you change the settings during the night, plus the LED display dims so there are no bright lights to disturb your sleep.

The result? I had no issues falling asleep and even if I did briefly wake up during the night the fan was so quiet that I barely noticed it and had no problems falling back to sleep. If anything, the gentle movement of air that I could faintly hear proved to be quite relaxing. There's even a natural wind mode which Duux claims "adjusts fan speed to mimic the rhythms of real wind, for an incredibly relaxing cooling experience."

On subsequent nights the days have been even hotter as we approach another heatwave and the Whisper Flex 2 has done a brilliant job of keeping me cooler at night without disturbing my sleep.

I also haven't had to worry about how much all of this is costing me in terms of electricity. According to Duux, it costs less than 1p per hour to run the Duux on the lowest setting. Paying just 8p for a night of fan-cooled sleep sounds like a bargain to me!

Switching to a desk fan

One of the things I love most about the Duux Whisper Flex 2 is how you can convert it from a pedestal fan to a desk fan in just a few seconds. Simply release the top section, remove the bottom column and then insert the top section of the fan directly into the base. It turns it from a 92cm standing fan to a handy 54cm desk/table fan that can sit neatly in my workspace.

My home office area gets full sun mid- to late-afternoon and can therefore become uncomfortably hot. When my laptop starts sounding like a plane that's about to take off, you know it's getting too warm in the room.

Adding the fan to my home workspace has been brilliant on those sunny afternoons. Rather than feel overtired in the heat, it's helped me to stay energised and refreshed towards the end of the day. It's also quiet enough to have on in the background during video meetings without disturbing everyone on the call.

The kids have also got in on the fan action too. Both of their bedrooms get the hot afternoon sun through their windows so during heatwaves their rooms can become unbearably hot.

My son has loved having the fan alongside his desk to keep him cool while he does his homework after school, while my daughter has been pinching it to lower the temperature in her bedroom in the evenings while she's at swim training, meaning it's cooler in there when she gets home and wants to go straight to bed.

Should you buy the Duux Whisper Flex 2?

It's safe to say that the whole family is a fan of the Duxx Whisper Flex 2. It works brilliantly for a multitude of uses, easily switching from a home office set-up to a taller pedestal fan for a bedroom.

The night mode is a big bonus for me, ensuring I have the benefit of a fan without having to worry about being disturbed by an appliance. It's also easier to move around the house than a portable air conditioning unit would be – even my two kids can easily carry it from one room to the next.

The reason I've only given it 4.5 stars instead of 5? Although I was able to download the Duxx app and locate the fan via Bluetooth, it wouldn't connect to our Wi-Fi. I tried various troubleshooting options, but we just couldn't get it to connect so I haven't been able to test how you control it from the app. Other reviews I've read online have said that it's easy to use with the app, so it could be the issue is with our internet and not the fan itself, especially as we've recently changed our router. I'll be trying again and add an update here once it's sorted!

That small issue hasn't stopped us enjoying the benefits of having a sleek, modern fan in the house. It's easy to control from the remote control or the base and I love how quiet it is, even when on the higher settings, something other reviewers are also quick to point out, with many comments saying that it's "ultra quiet".

Do I think it's worth the price tag? Although it's not the cheapest fan you can buy, it's certainly less expensive than other designer models and not as expensive as installing air conditioning. And if you want a fan that delivers on the cooling front, is super quiet and looks good sat in the corner of your room or on a desk, then yes, this is a smart choice.

Next on my list? I'm off to put my fan through another test and try the latest TikTok hack on how to use a fan to remove hot air from a room.

I'll confess to being intrigued by the concept of steam cleaning for a little while. Watching users blast dirt out of places that on the surface has a strange appeal. And, while I've tried other chemical free cleaning products, simply cleaning with hot water seems a little alien to me.

Could the Beldray 15-in1 Steam Cleaner really clean dirt without the help of even an eco-friendly cleaner? Would it tackle even tough marks such as limescale, and would I find the fact it was a corded appliance difficult when it came to cleaning in bathrooms?

Armed with the box, instructions and the many parts, I replaced some elements of my weekly clean with the Beldray 15-in1 Steam Cleaner, and having finally emerged from a cloud of steam, here's how I found the process.

What are the key features of the Beldray 15-in-1 Steam Cleaner?

Before we dive into how I found using the Beldray 15-in-1 Steam Cleaner, it will help to explain a little about its specification. Designed for use around the home, its main features are:

• Lightweight – 2kg
• 15-in-1 product that can be used on most surfaces and floors
• Rapid heat up - only 20 seconds until ready for use
• 550 ml watertank
• 16 mins of steam cleaning from a full tank
• Hand held or as floor cleaner with extension hozes
• Flexible hose for reaching awkward corners
• Variety of attachments
• 5m power cord
• 26.6 x 15 x 26.5 cm in size

Did the 15-in-1 design of the steam cleaner make it complicated to put together?

For some reason, I didn't associate the words 15-in-1 with a product that would have lots of different parts. I'd assumed that there would maybe be a few different nozzles, so when the box arrived, I was a little surprised to open it and find so many parts inside.

Add to that what felt like a slightly limited instruction manual, and my first impressions were that this could be a bit of a challenge for someone who wasn't that au fait with setting things up. Nonetheless, once I identified the different parts according to the instruction booklet, the rest of the set up was surprisingly simple.

You can simply use the steam cleaner as is, although adding the general nozzle means you can place a bit of distance between yourself and the steam which makes the experience more comfortable.

Once you've decided which fitting is right for the cleaning you want to do, it's a case of adding it securely to the end and turning it in the direction of the arrow (shown on the fitting) to make sure it's on tight. Then, it's time to add the water and let it heat up.

Filling the water tank is done by using the funnel and jug provided. Given it's a corded small appliance, it's not recommended you fill direct from the tap. It took around 4 full jugs to fill the Beldray 15-in-1 Steam Cleaner to the top and this needs to be done when the appliance is switched off.

A see-through section on the side of the main body of the cleaner clearly shows how much water is in there at any one point. You can refill as and when required as it only takes 20 seconds to heat up. A red light running around the top of the cleaner lights up to show when it's heating and then clears once it's ready.

Was the Beldray 15-in-1 steam cleaner easy to use and how did it perform?

My initial plan for testing the Beldray 15-in-1 Steam Cleaner was to test it in one or two locations in the bathroom, kitchen, on upholstery and on floors.

This changed a little – both for negative and positive reasons. The upholstery pad wasn't included in the box as it should have been – instead there were two floor mop covers, and secondly once I realised how powerful the steam cleaner was, I ended up using it in more areas than I had originally planned!

Did it work well when cleaning bathrooms?

My starting place was the bathroom. I have large crittal style shower screens and walk-in showers which collect limescale like there's no tomorrow. I used the window cleaner attachment which you slot over the upholstery cleaner and set to, in the hope it would remove the tough water marks.

Using the Beldary 15-in-1 steam cleaner on the shower screens was pretty easy. The long 5m cord meant I could plug it in in my bedroom when using it in the ensuite, and there's a plug outside the door of the family bathroom so access was simple.

In the ensuite, I made the mistake of using the fixed nozzle as opposed to the flexible hose which meant cleaning at the very bottom of the screen felt difficult. With the flexible hose however it was far easier to turn the squeegee style head in different directions.

The results? Although on first glance it appeared to clear the limescale quite well, it wasn't consistent across all of the screen, and the more stubborn deposits needed the help of some cleaning spray and a scrub with a microfibre cloth.

In the family bathroom I took a different approach and used the general nozzle to blast the shower screen before cleaning it my normal way with diluted Zoflora disinfectant from Amazon and a microfibre cloth. Compared to normal, this certainly felt like it helped the process and lifted some of the marks in advance.

In the remainder of the bathroom cleaning, I used it around the bathroom sealant on the shower tray, in grout lines, on the shower rail, inbuilt tiled recesses around the sink tap and then had a brainwave.

If you have males in the house, I'm hoping you'll relate (or maybe it's just the males in my house?), but if you don't feel free to read on as this point won't be relevant.

However, without going into too much detail, I often find the underneath of the toilet seat gets easily discoloured. Bleach removes the stains of course, but I wondered if steam could too?

I wasn't expecting a great result, but I added the brush tool to the end of the general nozzle and started to clean. To my surprise, it absolutely worked. I didn't take pictures as it didn't feel appropriate, but take my word that the underneath of the seat is now white again.

Mopping the bathroom floor once it was vacuumed was the final stage, and again, although I wasn't expecting huge results without any cleaning products, the bottom of the mop proved me wrong.

If anything, given the bathroom was only mopped a week ago and has had little use this week as one of my son's has been away, it may well have made it cleaner than my usual mop and bucket approach.

Where was it suitable for use in the kitchen?

As I have an open plan kitchen dining and living space, I was little more reluctant to use the steam cleaner too heavily in the kitchen, as having seen the amount of steam it produces, I didn't want to end up with a moisture heavy space.

I therefore decided to use it mainly in the corners and around the edge of kitchen worktops, to give the glass induction hob an extra cleaning blast, around taps and underneath the rim of the undercounter sink.

However, as with cleaning the bathroom, it struck me that there could be some additional uses for the steam cleaner that I'd not factored in. I'd also decided to deep clean my oven on Saturday night, meaning I had this job still to complete, along with the filter unit from my recirculating kitchen extractor fan being overdue a clean as well.

Once again, the steam cleaner proved its worth, helping to loosen the remaining food deposits from the oven racks, and blast easily through the grease build on on the extractor filter.

Did I like using the Beldray 15-in-1 cleaner and would I keep using it?

My main issue with the Beldray-15-in-1 cleaner? I cleaned for way longer than I normally would as I realised just how many other cleaning jobs I could tick off with it already set up and in use. It's not a complaint in the slightest as with regular use of the product, I am sure it would eventually cut down cleaning time in the long run.

It was slightly heavier to handle than I expected, although not uncomfortably so, and certainly wasn't harder to use on the floor than a standard mop.

A word of caution however. Please do read the warning leaflet that comes with it advising steam can still release from the unit even after you take your finger off the activation trigger. I forgot once or twice meaning I moved the unit and directed steam where it wasn't meant to go.

It didn't tackle the limescale in bathrooms quite as well as I'd hoped, but to be honest, I'm not surprised as it's never easy to shift. Other than that, it dealt with every other task I thew it at admirably.

Having been surprised at how many toxins cleaning chemicals were released into my home when I tested the Molekule Air Pro, it was also reassuring to get such a good clean only using water.

Would I continue using it to clean my home? Absolutely yes. Would I recommend it? I think it's worth the money for sure.

Next on the list to tackle are the grout lines on the bathroom floor tiles which are a little discoloured, and I'm interested to see how it will handle any mould that will undoubtedly appear on the grout lines in the shower. I'm also planning on getting hold of an upholstery pad to give my sofas a clean, which with two sons and a dog will certainly give it a run for its money.

I have to be honest, cleaning our pool is probably the chore I least looked forward to doing.

Having to sweep and net the pool dozens of times a day, maintaining the filtration system and still not getting the pool spotless was very inefficient and laborious.

So I decided to try the AIPER Seagull SE Wireless Robot Pool Cleaner (available from Amazon) to try and solve my swimming pool problems and here is how it did.

Performance review

The AIPER Seagull SE offers a simple cordless solution to cleaning our pool. I just need to drop it in and leave it.

Previously, I was having to sweep the floor and leave our filtration system on all day, driving up the cost of the pool, and even then there would be unwanted dirt in the pool.

Now I don't need to do that. For the last few months I have saved time and money as the filtration system is no longer needed with my new robot friend doing the heavy lifting.

I have found that the AIPER Seagull SE will suck up most things it comes into contact with. Dirt, frogs (just kidding!), and leaves will prove no problem.

Limitations

Although, larger or heavier objects like rocks can prove challenging and these still need require manual removal.

Another issue is the AIPER Seagull SE cannot go up significant slopes. I have a 45° slope in my pool that the vacuum can only go up half way and it also can't clean the walls of my pools like high-end, more expensive robot pool cleaners can.

Besides that though the pool remains clean and with its good battery life I can leave it for almost two hours before it needs recharging.

Easy retrieval with self-parking feature

With previous pool cleaners I've had, an annoying problem, besides pipes, has been retrieving it once its done.

Having to take out a pool cleaner, sometimes multiple times a day, when it's in the middle of the pool (very much a first-world problem I know) can get frustrating.

However, this problem has been removed by the AIPER Seagull SE as once it is finished it has the smart feature of parking next to a wall meaning I only have to pick it up with a small rod (one is provided) and it can go straight back on charge.

And with it only being around 3 kg, it's easy to pluck out the pool.

Upkeeping

Another benefit is how often the AIPER Seagull SE needs emptying.

As I use mine quite regularly there doesn't tend to be much debris left to pick up meaning I often use it four/five times before needing to empty it.

But if it's at the start of summer and lots of filth is left on the floor of the pool then it will require emptying almost every time to maintain optimal performance.

This isn't a problem though as emptying the robot simply requires flipping the open switches at both ends and then emptying the dirt inside.

Final thoughts

The AIPER Seagull SE may not be the most powerful or fully-featured robotic pool cleaner on the market, but for its price point, it’s a smart and effective tool for everyday pool maintenance.

It's cordless, lightweight, and quiet, and it handles common pool debris with ease. The self-parking feature is a small but welcome touch that makes retrieval simple, and the 90-minute runtime covers most small to mid-size pools without issue.

Of course, it has its limits – it struggles with slopes, doesn't clean walls, and won't handle heavy debris like large rocks. But if your pool has a flat bottom and you want to save time and reduce reliance on your filtration system, the Seagull SE is a solid, affordable choice.

For me, it's taken the grunt work out of pool care, and that alone makes it worth it.

Sometimes fortune is on our side, and having the opportunity to review the MeacoFan Sefte 10" Pedestal Air Circulator when the temperature dial is reaching an all time peak is without doubt, perfect timing.

While I tell myself every year I'll invest in one of the best air cooling fans, I've not kept to my word. The consequence of not taking action? I've left buying one until the last minute every time it gets hot and then end up panic buying a cheap, plastic version that barely lasts the summer.

Needless to say my opinions on pedestal fans have been less than favourable. But, having experienced the soft, cooling quiet joy of this fan, I'm more than happy to fully accept you get what you pay for – and in the case of the MeacoFan Sefte 10" Pedestal Air Circulator the premium price is returned to you ten fold.

First impressions and set up

Although tower fans such as the Dyson Tower Cool Fan have changed the design dynamic in terms of how air cooling fans look, it feels like pedestal fans have lagged behind in the style stakes. Thankfully that's now changing, with the likes of Meaco and Shark developing more aesthetically friendly products. And while some older styles can still feel cumbersome with their large diameter and pronged feet, new designs are far more contemporary and streamlined in feel.

I knew the MeacoFan Sefte range was different to the older-style fans, but wasn't expecting quite how much I'd like its appearance when it arrived. Yes it's still a product with a functional aim, but the moulded white design, with LED display and remote control bring it well and truly up to date.

The packaging for the fan was neat and simple, and includes a visual explanation of how the name Sefte comes from an Old English word meaning 'quiet, gentle and undisturbed.' A nice touch, that rings true once you start using the fan.

Neatly contained inside more packaging inside the main box, the fan was easy to remove, although I'll confess to spending a few minutes being convinced it was missing the columns that are required to change the height of the fan. If you do buy one, don't panic like I did, they are in there, just on the rear of the packaging that contains the fan head and base.

Fixing the base, columns and head unit together is simple. You align the gold metal guide pin with the gold hole and insert to bring the items together. Tighten the security collars to secure the parts in place, plug in and you're ready to be cooled. It's that simple. Remove the security tab from the remote control and you can then use the fan by either pressing the interface on the fan, or the remote.

An instruction booklet is included that's comprehensive but clear and not too wordy, meaning it's easy to get the fan up and running. Once I'd found the columns it was set up in a matter of minutes.

Another plus point? It comes with a black storage bag meaning once summer's over, you can neatly pack it away and find a place for it in your loft storage.

MeacoFan Sefte 10" Pedestal Air Circulator Specifications

The specifications of the fan are pretty impressive and the product also comes with a free three-year warranty.

Its main features are:

• Whisper quiet airflow from 25dB
• 3 angles of vertical and horizontal oscillation
• Adjustable pedestal – can be used at three different heights
• Remote control
• Night function
• Timer
• Eco option (auto adjusts fan speed to room temp)
• Maximum air flow 18.33m3/minute
• Net weight 5.4kg

How and where I've used the MeacoFan Sefte 10" Pedestal Air Circulator

First up for the fan treatment was my open-plan kitchen, dining and living room. It's not a large space, and shutters on the sash windows mean I've already got some tools in place to keep a room cool without air con. But, it still gets hot when the temperatures higher and we're all sat in once space.

Finding somewhere to put it wasn't an issue because of its size or appearance, more because of the location of plug sockets and the amount of furniture I have in one room. Floorspace is limited, so for the purposes of testing, I've simply located it where the air flow can move around the room, and I can benefit from it during the day as I work from home.

As is the case when you start using any new piece of tech, it's compulsory to run through all the available functions, so I put the fan to the test.

From minimum to maximum speed, no oscillation to full vertical and horizontal oscillation (which I found pretty impressive), eco setting which auto adjusts the fan to suit the room temperature, timer mode and display lights on or off I've tried them all.

Any issues? No. As the headline said, I'm 'fan-girling' this fan for good reason. It's quiet, has kept me cool, has enough tech to make me feel it's a great gadget, is easy to use and offers plenty of flexibility. It's not disturbed my work, I've had phone and video calls with no problems and it's certainly not disrupted my son's TV watching in the evening.

And yes, in case you're wondering, we have all pretended we're in a Beyonce video with a wind machine when it's on full blast!

But can it deal with hot and sweaty nights?

And so we come to bedtime, and the second, and perhaps most 'testing' location for the fan. My bedroom is on the third floor of a listed building located on the main high street of the town in which I live. It has single-glazed sash windows, and while it's not a busy town, opening the windows at night means I risk being disturbed by some traffic, or late night revellers leaving some nearby pubs.

Add to this the fact I'm a fairly light sleeper, and it means I'm asking for as little noise as possible from any piece of kit I bring into my bedroom. To date, I've achieved success with Meaco products, having tested the MeacoDry ABC 12L Dehumidifier during winter to help deal with window condensation, so I was hopeful that I wouldn't be adding the noise of the fan to the reasons why I couldn't sleep.

The fan is light to carry, even when fully assembled, so I was able to move it upstairs easily. I used the night mode as it removes the LED light display, the beep sound from pressing buttons, and then reduces the fan speed every half hour until it reaches the lowest speed.

The result? I slept soundly and woke fresh as a daisy. No disturbances, just the odd recollection of stirring in the night and feeling a lovely breeze wash over the bed.

To be perfectly honest, even if it got hotter at night, it's that quiet even when on eco mode that I'd be comfortable using it on this setting too. Lights don't disturb me, but if you do prefer a pitch black room, you should be aware the remote control glows in the dark, so you may choose to leave that in a drawer if you are using the fan in a bedroom.

My final verdict will come as no surprise

It will clearly be no surprise to you that my final verdict and suggestion for the MeacoFan Sefte 10" Pedestal Air Circulator is to buy one. I'll certainly be keeping an eye out in case it pops up in the Amazon Prime Day Sale as my sons are hankering after one for their bedrooms too.

Yes, the price-tag of around £175 with the storage bag is more than you'll pay for some pedestal fans, but if you don't want to, or can't invest in installing air conditioning, climate changes means we're likely to need a way of cooling our homes one way or another. So, if you're going to buy a fan, it's worth investing in one that looks good and performs well.

If I had two minor complaints, it would be firstly that the face of the fan is black, whereas the rest of the unit is white. My personal preference would be an all-white finish, but it's a minor detail that's based on opinion rather than performance based.

Second, having to take it apart to adjust the height isn't as easy as having an adjustable mechanism. So, while it's a simple procedure, it's just not quite as quick as it could be.

Worried about the daily running costs? Don't be. So far, according to my smart meter, it's costing just 1p per hour to run. Even if it's on for 24 hours a day, that's only 24 pence a day for a few weeks, or at the most, a couple of months a year when I'll be adding that amount to my electricity bill. Worth it? For a cooler living environment and improved home ventilation, absolutely.

Living on a farm and running a farm shop has its benefits, but many drawbacks.

One of the main ones is burglars. If I was to tell you the amount of times we have had people coming into our gates and taking something you'd be amazed we're still open.

So I decided to try and combat this and I think I've found the best deterrent possible; eufy's home security camera range. It has proven to be the best home security system we have ever had, and here's why.

Easy installation

When unboxing six security cameras with three solar panels I can't lie I was initially daunted by the prospect of having to install them and set them up.

Previously we installed four security cameras outside the corner of each of the outside of the house, which needed to be wall mounted, which was difficult through our pebble-dashed home.

This wasn't a problem with the eufy cameras though as each came with a mount that could be installed on windowsills with ease, helped by the inclusion of drill hole guides.

Other than that I only need to install the eufy app on my phone, click the sync button on my camera and S380 Homebase, and done, I was ready to go. All in all, this took about 30 minutes.

More features than you could ever need

Briefly reading the manual didn't quite prepare me for the amount of features my eufy cameras possessed.

Starting with the eufyCam S3 Pro one would think it just takes recordings and that's it, but no.

If someone comes onto my property and I'm not home I can speak directly through the camera to ask what they're doing, and if it's at night I can use my 'spotlight' feature to illuminate them so their face is clear on camera.

However, this may not be necessary as the camera has a 'Daylight' feature to make the recordings at night seem like it's the middle of afternoon, even if it's pitch black outside.

And by the way, all of this is in 4K quality. This is very important as previously when we've had burglars our old cameras were unable to capture the license plates so nothing could be done, whereas now we have no problem with this.

Facial recognition system

As part of the initial set up you can set up images of all anyone you deem safe so when you do receive notifications the app can only tell you when a stranger comes onto your property.

Now anybody who is unrecognised will be recorded as well as all of their actions on my property. It will then store the data on my phone to review later

Thankfully none of those who were 'unfamiliar faces' on my app were of any danger, but if they were I would have all of the evidence I needed.

If needed and if I was to be extra cautious I can set up an alarm so that anyone who does show up who I'm not expecting I can set of a sound and light alarm to warn of intruders.

The SoloCam S340 provides even more security

If you need something more heavy-duty, eufy provides again. The eufy SoloCam S340 steps things up a knotch and justifies its higher price point and need for its own, personalised solar panel.

The S3 Pro is ideal if you are covering one area and want your camera to face one direction that you want protected.

However, the SoloCam covers a much larger space on your property with its view 360° and 70° tilt as well an 8x, zoom allowing you to see as far as 50 feet away clearly, as well as including all of the features of the S3 Pro.

If that wasn't already enough then its AI facial recognition function really did blow me away.

During set up you can turn this function on which will automatically follow the movement of any human on your property meaning there will be no blind spots for potential thieves to hide. And again, any activity will automatically be recorded.

eufy home security range

No monthly subscription fees or electricity costs

I have seen security cameras that don't need a subscription before but these eufy security cameras also save me money on my electricity bills.

With each camera including a solar panel either on top of or attached to them, I don't have to pay anything to keep my home safe after the initial purchase, which wasn't the case with my previously wired security cameras.

Although the weather hasn't been all sunny it will be interesting to see how the cameras cope with gloomier weather, but so far the battery on all of my camera's that are all around my house haven't dropped below three bars.

Final thoughts

I don't want to tempt fate but we haven't seen any thieves yet, and I'm not putting that down to the presence of my eufy security cameras but I can rest easy knowing if anything was to happen every possible detail of the suspects could be handed to the police and I would be warned beforehand.

Since installing eufy's security cameras, peace of mind has become part of daily life.

With crystal-clear footage, smart alerts and powerful features - all without ongoing costs - these cameras have quietly become one of the best decisions I’ve made for our home.

And while I hope we never have to test them in a serious situation, I know we’re ready if we do.

Although I don't claim to drink the recommended amount of water each day, I do appreciate the difference between a glass of water that tastes good and one that tastes 'off'.

Likewise, seeing the limescale build up quickly on the inside of my kettle causes me some concern when I consider how many coffees I consume each day that contains this water. And, there's no doubt that the taste changes the worse it gets.

Plus, having a health conscious son who would far prefer to drink filtered or bottled water each day if it wasn't so expensive, means water filters and water softeners are a regular topic of conversation – but I've yet to commit to installing one. So, when the opportunity to test the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter came along I was interested to see if would be a potential solution to my needs.

Specification and design

The Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter is a self-install water filter. However, unlike other products, it doesn't require any DIY skills or plumbing knowledge. Instead of sitting underneath your sink and connecting to the water supply, you simply fit it to your tap. It's suitable for around 90% of all taps, but if yours is one it doesn't fit, there are also a range of adapters available.

Available in a white or chrome finish, the product is available on the Tappwater site as an annual subscription model with a 12 months supply of filters, or as a starter pack with two months worth of filters. However, it's also easily purchased online as a starter kit from Amazon.

Filters need replacing every two months (regardless of how much you use it) and the product claims to remove over 100 contaminants from your water but leave essential minerals in place with its five stage filtration process.

Other benefits include a 45 day trial, lifetime guarantee on the annual subscription, two years on the starter pack and the option to receive reminders about it being time to replace your filter.

Installing the filter

Worried you have zero DIY skills? Don't be, I can assure you the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter doesn't need any. As long as it fits your tap with the adapter supplied, (as it did mine) it's simply a case of unboxing it and following the instructions on the inside lid of the box.

Step one: unscrew the end of your existing tap. I chose to install the filter in my kitchen as I was most keen to see how clean our drinking water would become.

Step two: Attach the adapter to the end of the tap where you have removed the current fitting.

Step three: Pop on the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter which already has the filter inserted.

Using the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter

Once the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter is installed you have two options available to you. Turn the diverter on the one side of the adapter so that water only flows through the filter, or only turn it to filter use when required. The filter will need changing every two months, regardless of how much you use it, so that shouldn't necessarily need to influence your decision.

However, while it would make sense to use the filter permanently given it's based on length of use, rather than volume, in my experience, there's a slight flaw in the product that means I'm only using it when running water for drinking, cooking or filling the kettle. This issue is the difference in water flow when run through the filter.

I benefit from fast running water in my apartment, but using the filter reduces this substantially. The water still runs out of the tap at an acceptable rate, but by no means is it as fast as it is when I turn the diverter and use the unfiltered tap – such as when running hot water to wash dishes. It's tasks like this that see me switching back to the tap, rather than using the filter.

Is this really a problem? In the big scheme of things it's not, although it has led to complaints from family members about how long it takes to get the water cold for a glass of water, and can add a few seconds to daily tasks like filling the kettle and pans.

But, using it requires no extra work than operating the tap as normal. It couldn't be easier.

Tests and findings

Prior to installing the filter, I purchased the Kedixiest water testing kit from Amazon to see what the current quality of my water was like. The results were as expected, no real nasties, but a relatively high reading regarding the water hardness. Testing the filtered water prior to writing this review, the results were slightly improved, with the water hardness still towards the higher end, but lower than before.

How reliable this test pack is of course impossible to tell, so the taste and kettle tests are perhaps a better indicator of the Tappwater EcoPro Compact's success rate.

I also conducted a blind water tasting test on my sons, filling glasses of water with filtered and non-filtered water in order to see if they could distinguish between the two. Water was placed in identical glasses and they both sniffed and tasted the water and noted which one they preferred, and which one they felt was filtered.

My younger son chose the unfiltered version, but said this was because it was more chilled – as previously mentioned, the water is less cold unless you run it for longer.

However, my oldest son chose the water that had come through the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter as it had no smell, felt cleaner in his mouth and left no taste. All attributes I'd have described in the same way when tasting the water side by side.

And finally, I descaled my kettle before I started using the water Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter so that I could start with a clean kettle to see if it stayed clean. Normally the limescale builds up very quickly but to date, it's still very shiny inside which is pleasing to see.

Costs

As previously stated, there are two options for purchasing the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter and prices quoted are as currently show on the website (April 2025).

An annual subscription is available for £99.90 for the first year, with the second year renewed at a cost of £69. You can pause or renew at anytime, or purchase one year's supply at a one off cost of £150.

For the starter pack which comes with all the components but only one filter (two months supply), you will pay £69.90. Six additional refills can be purchased for £98 which would bring the total cost to just over £167.

However, a quick search online reveals you can buy the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter for £69 and six filters for £69 from B&Q, so it's certainly worth shopping around before deciding which option is right for you. Although the subscription model comes with a lifetime guarantee, even the one off purchase offers two years, and with the rate at which new kitchen innovations are developed, you may find yourself faced with other choices in two years time anyway.

But how do the costs equate to other options for filtered water such as bottled water? Looking at a cost comparison, it's important to weigh up both an eco-cost and monetary cost.

Based on an average 2 person household consuming 1.5 litres of water per person, per day, its the equivalent of not using 730 1.5 litre plastic bottles, or 1,095 1 litre bottles.

In terms of how this looks on your budget, it's currently possible to buy 6 x 1.5 litre bottles of Evian water at Tesco for £5.50. To meet the needs of 2 people this equates to purchasing 122 packs at a cost of £671 per year. While cheaper bottled water is available, it's clear that cost wise there are indeed benefits to installing a permanent water filter such as the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter in your home.

Final verdict

Overall, I was pleasantly surprised by how easy the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter was both to install, and use. I've looked at a variety of filters over the last few months, and while many claim to be easy to install, messing with the pipes under the sink to attach one feels like it has an element of risk attached – especially when you live in a first floor apartment and any flooding will impact not just you, but the floor below.

Being able to simply attach the filter directly to the tap was a huge bonus and literally took minutes. Cost wise, it's clearly more cost-effective than buying bottled water and as I only have a small fridge, using a large filter jug simply isn't an option either. I've also tried those in the past and they end up more empty than full as no-one remembers to fill the jug!

Taste wise I feel like I'm drinking more water as a result of the filter being in place, and seeing less limescale in the kettle and on glasses is definitely a bonus.

However, while it certainly has it's benefits and will be staying in situ for now, there are two issues for me that leave it slightly lacking in terms of meeting all my main requirements.

The main niggle for me is with the reduced water flow. Although running the water for longer to make it cold probably isn't consuming as much extra water as I think it is, psychologically it feels wasteful to see the water running down the plughole. Of course, if you prefer your drinking water to not be as cold, then this won't be a problem for you.

Secondly, from a design perspective, while the chrome option works with my type of kitchen tap, it won't suit everyone's kitchen design. White is the alternative choice and neither of these finishes would suit kitchen ideas that feature gold, brass or black fixtures and fittings.

Do I feel like I've found a permanent solution to my water filter requirements? In my current property where I can't afford to lose any space to an under sink solution, nor do I have space for a large kitchen appliances such as a fridge with a built in filtered water dispenser, it feels like the Tappwater EcoPro Compact Tap Filter offers a good option for now and I see no reason why I would switch it for something else.

But if I moved, I think I would certainly be considering alternative option for both of the above reasons.

For more filtered water options, find out what you can expect to pay for other water softener costs and what our reviewer thought of the Kinetico Water Softener when he installed one in his home.

While I'm an advocate of using appliances such as dehumidifiers to help make the air inside my home fresher, I've not yet committed to investing in a state of the art air purifier. So, when the opportunity to review the Molekule Air Pro arose, I was keen to put it to the test.

Living in a first floor apartment on a busy high street in the middle of a town, had led me to assume the air inside my home is far from fresh. Dust, smoke and car fumes make their way inside – less so in the winter when windows are closed – but in the summer when the windows are open to help with ventilation, it's impossible for the air quality to not decline.

But, could a single air purifier make a difference to my home, are there actually any issues with the air in my home, and just how big is the problem? Would the Molekule Air Pro noticeably impact our health or is it just a background gadget or, dare I say it, even a gimmick?

I've been testing the Molekule Air Pro for around six weeks and here's what I've discovered.

Buy the Molekule Air Pro online today

How does the Molekule Air Pro work to improve air quality?

According to the manufacturer, "Molekule Air Pro purifiers use PECO technology and true HEPA 99.97% particle-capture efficiency rate to capture and destroy pollutants in large living and workplaces."

Essentially, through the presence of a physical filter cartridge – the HEPA filter – and the power of ultraviolet light – PECO – toxins are removed from the air leaving the air inside your home cleaner as a result. The HEPA filter is replaceable, and can be purchased from Amazon and other retailers, while the patented PECO technology is part of the machine.

The benefit of using an air purifier such as the Molekule Air Pro, or the Dyson air purifier, is it does all the work behind the scenes, with the only requirement from you being to change the filter when it tells you to. Sounds easy? But is it, and does it noticeably purify air?

Molekule Air Pro specification

The Molekule Air Pro specification can be split into two sections. The practical features and then the more technical ones that do the work behind the scenes.

Design and product features

• Size: 58.6 cm high, 27.8 cm wide
• Weight: 10.83kg
• Cord length: 180cm
• Power consumption: Lowest speed – 26 W/h, highest speed – 123 W/h
• Sound levels: Lowest speed – 33 dBa, highest speed – 64 dBa
• Fan speeds: 6 manual levels
• Control: Touch control and app
• Automated modes: Auto protect: standard and quiet
• Warranty: 2 years limited

Technical specification

• Room size coverage: Up to 1000 sq ft (92.9 m²) with avg. 8-ft. ceilings
• Detection: Particulate matter (PM1, PM2.5, PM10) down to 0.3 µm, VOCs, CO2, relative humidity
• Filters: PECO-HEPA Tri-Power filter
• FDA clearance (US relevance only): 510(k) Class II: Cleared for medical use to destroy bacteria, viruses & mould, and collect particles

First impressions

The Molekule Air Pro, which can be purchased on Amazon, is certainly the right product for you if you have a keen eye for home appliances with a modern design. It arrived well packaged with emotive text printed on the exterior of the box. Easy to follow instructions are revealed as you open it on a large piece of inner cardboard, or a smaller instruction booklet is also included if you prefer to read and digest information before setting it up.

A stylish cloth bag covers the air purifier which made it feel more like you were opening a luxury product rather than a small household appliance. Perhaps to be expected given the £799 price-tag, but a nice touch nonetheless.

There's no denying its sleek looks and minimalistic design once removed from the bag. Featuring a matt silver shell with a white base and vegan leather carrying handle, there's a fin like design to the flat top but other than that, it's pleasingly simple. It's quite large in size but as it looks good, it doesn't feel too obtrusive. As it's a relatively expensive high tech piece of kit, you'd expect it to look a certain way and it doesn't disappoint.

Setting up the air purifier

As mentioned, easy to follow instructions are printed on cardboard giving you clear advice on what you'll need to do to get your Molekule Air Pro working. It's not quite plug and play as you do need to install the filter before you turn it on, but don't be put off by this as it's a simple task.

Unwrap the filter, follow the instructions to push and turn the top of the filter so it releases, pop in the filter unit, close again and you're done.

Downloading the app that you use to control the air purifier is also easy. It's available on the App Store and Google Play and once you've installed it, clear onscreen instructions will guide you through the different steps of connecting your product to the app.

Once it's paired, it says it will take around six hours for the purifier to fully calibrate. Then, there are two main settings you can use, auto-protect and manual. Auto-protect has been my default as it removes the need to do anything other than turn it off if you don't want to leave it running while you're away from the home, or at night.

Using the Molekule Air Pro

In order to get a fuller picture of what it's like to use the Molekule Air Pro, I've tested it in three different locations around my home, although the same basic steps have all been followed when using it.

With the filter in place and the app set up, all you need to do is simply switch it on – either via the touch panel on the top of the unit or using the app. Having chosen the auto-protect setting the first time, it's automatically defaulted to this mode each time, although you can change it if you choose. Given the product's level of intelligence it seems unnecessary to have a manual mode, as after all, it's reading the air quality far more accurately than I can.

There's also a standard or quiet mode and I've of course chosen the quiet mode as it's being used in a space where I both live and work.

In the living room, I've used it for 24 hour stretches at a time, but also switched it off at bedtime and back on again in the morning.

My son has also used it in his bedroom for a period of time, adopting a similar method of use. As the weather hasn't been warm, which has meant I can't have the windows open in the living room for long as it's too cold (other than performing daily house burping), I've popped it in a bedroom which overlooks the main street and left a window open to see how the outdoor air affects the readings and performance.

Checking the air quality

There are a number of ways in which you can use the Molekule Air Pro to check the air quality. Audible sound is the first notification you will get that your air quality has declined. In auto-protect mode, the fan speed will increase when the air purifier needs to work harder to clean the air – another reason why leaving it in auto-protect mode makes sense, as in theory it can help you identify what toxins are causing the problem.

If you are close to the unit, you can also use the touch panel on the top of the purifier to check what the air quality is, and as well as showing you it as a percentage, the display also changes colour with different colours signifying different levels. Green is good, orange moderate, red bad and purple very bad.

Scroll across to the next screen on the panel and it will show you the main offenders and causes of pollutants in the air – even when the air quality is good. These may be VOCs, carbon dioxide or particles of varying size.

If however you want a more detailed breakdown of what's going on, the app is your main port of call. As well as showing you the air quality score and a breakdown of each different potential pollutant, you can look at daily or weekly graphs which show how many hours were spent at different quality levels, what the pollutants were during this time and also check the relative humidity in the room which can be handy during winter if you struggle with mould and condensation.

You can also dive deeper into each pollutant by tapping that section on the app screen and it will display what could be the cause. For example, where VOCs could be found in your home, or if you have an abundance of fine particles, what could be causing this. It doesn't tell you specifically what is causing yours, but at least gives you an indication of where the problem may be.

Other than wiping it down when cleaning, there are no other steps involved in using the Molekule Air Pro until you need to change the filter – and the app and product will tell you when this needs to happen. It's estimated this will be around every 6 months.

Results

For me personally, measuring the success of the Molekule Air Pro is perhaps less about the scientific results and more about how it's made me think and how we have all felt.

One of the most positive results for me has been how it's made us have a far greater awareness of the toxins produced as a result of what I'd consider a fairly standard lifestyle. I can tell you for sure that cleaning products will make the air purifier leap into action, as will frying meat of any kind.

Cook a steak, air purifier kicks in, cook bacon, the same. Burn toast, it's working hard. Light a scented candle and you may change your mind about how long you leave it on for when you hear the air purifier fans start to work that little bit harder. All small daily habits, most of which will have to carry on, but it's certainly been interesting to think about how poor the air quality would be without the Molekule Air Pro on.

Surprisingly, when placed next to an open window and street fumes, the air quality in the room hasn't deteriorated anywhere near as much as I expected. In fact made very little impact to the air quality as a whole. Some concerns have been the high readings in my son's room at night which show VOCs to be the biggest culprit, and we're still not entirely sure why, so will need to investigate this further.

A good sign of its ability to detect toxins is also shown in the way how when it's in my bedroom, but I clean the kitchen which is located in the room below, the air purifier has quickly identified the toxins and increased how hard it works to remove them.

I live in a listed building, and only have a recirculation extractor fan in the kitchen so smells often permeate into the bedroom – but I hadn't realised quite how much.

And, although I can't prove this, my younger son who last year coughed consistently for four months and has had numerous bouts of upper respiratory issues since, is so far clear of any problems since we started using it. It may be coincidence but it certainly makes we wonder if it has contributed towards this.

If you are prepared to sit down and analyse graphs, you can of course get more scientific data to demonstrate results, but unless you make lifestyle changes, it's likely your air quality will still fluctuate on a daily basis. But, having an air purifier will definitely help deal with those fluctuations.

Final verdict

Prior to using the Molekule Air Pro I've always been very aware of air pollutants and what causes them. Having lived in city and rural locations I'm well aware of how cleaner air does make a difference outdoors, but I'll admit to not having paid as much attention to it indoors.

Yes I'll choose low VOC paints over normal ones, but I've always used fairly strong smelling cleaning products and admit to buying more than my fair share of scented candles. After my son's respiratory issues last year, I did stop buying plug in air-fresheners, but with a house comprising two sons and now a small dog, you can't help but be conscious of the resulting odours and trying to mask them is my natural default mode.

However, since testing the air purifier I'm realising it's more about removing them efficiently instead, as there's no doubt smells have dissipated faster since using it. Plus, having seen the levels rise through daily activities that I can't stop (cleaning and cooking being the main ones), it's made me understand how many toxins we breathe in without even realising it.

On the downside, should you be considering it for a bedroom, I'd only recommend it if you don't require a pitch black bedroom. My son does and he's found it hard to sleep with it on. The blue UV light is an essential part of the air purifier and so it glows at night when left on. You could turn the unit off, but as the reading from my son's room has shown, there could be toxins lurking in the air even when you don't realise it. Has it impacted my daily electricity costs leaving it on for long stretches? Not at all according to my smart meter.

Another minor negative is that I'm also not sure the app is as user friendly as it could be. While I've found out what I need to know, it's mainly been through trial and error rather than obvious signposting on the app. If you were a little apprehensive about using apps, I can imagine you'd not get the information you needed and could find it a little frustrating.

There's no doubt the product is cleaning the air in my home and it has made me far more self-aware of how I can improve the air we breathe. I've also no complaints about how the product looks, so would I recommend the Molekule Air Pro?

Yes would be my answer. It's performed as it said it would and I think it's done a great job in educating me about air quality. If you live in a built up area you have little protection against outdoor pollutants and given how many indoor ones we clearly generate as well, it would be a wise investment for anyone wanting to protect themselves and their family.

It's not a cheap investment, but can you ever put a price on improving your health? Removing any toxins will undoubtedly have a positive impact and while there are cheaper models out there, the Molekule Air Pro, which can be purchased on Amazon feels solid, capable and clever and will work hard for you and expect little in return, just a clean filter every six months.

Having previously owned a home with a log burner, I'm no stranger to the allure of a fire with a roaring flame. But, living in a first floor apartment means my heating choices are more limited. With no chimney – or opportunity to add one or a flue – any additional heat sources need to be smokeless.

While bioethanol fireplaces and stoves claim to offer warmth and fire without smoke, they are generally considered less effective other types of fires. Nonetheless, with winter evenings on the horizon and cold snaps predicted, I was interested to see if one could make a difference to my open plan kitchen, dining and living room space.

Add to this the fact my property is a Grade II listed building with single glazed sash windows, I wasn't sure if the Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove would be up to the job. But, realising I could get one in a shade called Flamingo Pink sealed the deal, and after moving some furniture around, one has been taking centre stage for a while now and here's how it's performed.

What is bioethanol fuel?

If you're concerned that log burner ideas are not always environmentally friendly, choosing a bioethanol stove could be for you. Distilled from wheat and crop waste, bioethanol fuel is smokeless and the CO2 released is off set by the CO2 absorbed by the plants when they were growing.

It's readily available online or in stores and generally comes in 1L bottles meaning you can still buy in bulk, but don't need to find log store ideas to keep your wood dry.

You can even buy scented versions such as this Forest scented bioethanol fuel from Imaginfires if you're looking for something more akin to wood. I've personally used Amazon so far to purchase my fuel and there are a wide range of options available.

Initial impressions

Taking delivery of the Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove was a little more challenging than I expected – for no other reason than I had underestimated how well packaged and heavy it would be.

It arrived on a large lorry on a pallet – perhaps not an issue in a more residential area, but I live on the main high street in my area and can't easily dispose of excess packaging. Nonetheless, despite the parking restrictions, the delivery driver was very accommodating and took the larger pallet and some packing away, leaving me with just a small section of pallet and protective layers of packaging.

Carrying it up the flight of entrance stairs to the ground floor was a two man job for myself and my eldest son, but was achievable and absolutely worth it when I took the final layers of packaging off and revealed the stove. It was fantastically robust, clearly constructed of good quality 3mm steel and cast iron materials with a smart cushioning heat proof trim on the stove's door a glass with a decent thickness to protect against breakage.

Very well wrapped and perfectly pink, it contained all the elements needed too, including a bottle of bioethanol fuel, plus ones I wasn't expecting such as a hot glove and a can of colour matched touch up spray – a thoughtful addition, particularly when you've chosen a colour other than the standard black.

There are plenty of colour options aside from Flamingo pink and metallic black too, from dove grey, spice red, and raincoat yellow to Miami blue, straw cream and peapod green. These can be chosen when purchasing the stove through Direct Stoves online.

Setting up the Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove

The major benefit of this beautiful little stove is that it can be easily "installed" yourself, perhaps with the help of another person for lifting. There's no flue needed and you won't need building regulations approval or other consents to add it to a space. It simply goes in wherever you need it to go, you don't even need a hearth unless you want to put it on carpet or other combustible surface, according to Arada's website.

The components were fairly easy to deal with too, such as screwing on the remainder of the handle and inserting the bioethanol grate. That said, with no printed instructions included (the company chooses not to include them to help with paper wastage), it's important to go online and follow the instructions step-by-step. They can be found here on the Arada Stoves website.

Although bioethanol fuel is smokeless, in the same way that installing a log burner means following important rules and guidance, it's the same when setting up a bioethanol stove. It needs to be placed certain distances from walls and furniture and if you can't meet these guidelines, there are limiting bolts you can use on the burner to help reduce the amount of flame and heat it produces.

Likewise, it's recommended you securely fasten the stove to the floor and wall to make it completely safe. Steps that really are essential to follow if you are adding one to an environment with young children. On that note, it's also important to understand that in the same way as a stove, a bioethanol stove also gets very hot to touch, so it's worth considering where you will use one if it seems like it might be right for your home. Plus it's important it's placed on a non combustible surface such as slate or a 12mm thick glass hearth.

Once it's securely in place, adding the handle, popping in the metal burner tray where you pour the bioethanol fuel and arranging the faux embers are all simple steps.

Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove specification

The Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove is designed to look like a traditional log burner and it really does look that part but without any of wood burner regulation hassles. The specifications of this version are as follows:

• Dimensions: W440mm x H558mm x D385mm
• Weight unpacked: 40kg
• Materials: 3mm steel body and cast iron door
• Output: 2.46kw
• Burner capacity: 0.8L (1L including overfill)
• Maximum burn rate: 0.35L/hour
• Typical runtime from full: 2-4.5 hours
• Guarantee: 10 years on the stove body
• Colours: available in a variety of colours
• Extras: Decorative flue available if required

Using the Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove

If you're considering purchasing a bioethanol stove such as the Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove and want to get it up and running immediately, there are a number of items I'd recommend buying before it arrives. A non-combustible surface such as this curved glass hearth from Direct Stoves is the more obvious one, a plastic jug and small funnel such as this one from Amazon are ones you may not think about, as well as a carbon monoxide detector like this one on Amazon.

Why do you need these? Again, it's to make use of the stove safer and more practical. It's important not to spill or overfill the bioethanol fuel when pouring it into the burner, therefore being able to accurately measure the volume of liquid means a jug with measurements saves having to 'guestimate' how much liquid you've poured in. Likewise, to avoid splashes or spills, a funnel helps contain the liquid and direct it far easier.

Gradually increase fuel quantity

Although most fuel is supplied in 1L bottles (the maximum capacity of the stove), for the first use, it's recommended you start by using around 250-500ml of fuel. Although this will give you a shorter burn time, it's a good way of understanding how the stove works. I followed this advice, and enjoyed around 45 minutes of burn time.

When you've poured in the fuel, use a long handled lighter such as this one from Amazon to light the fuel. It lights immediately and then you can close the door. Initially the glass will fog over, but this soon clears and the flames will be dancing.

The reflective panel to the rear of the inside helps magnify the appearance of the flames and will be larger if you use more fuel.

With each use, I've gradually increased the amount of fuel to around 850ml and although there is the option to 'turn off' the flames by pulling a burner cover across using the supplied metal tool and hot glove, I've been happy to let it burn out and not done this – although I have closed the cover after each use for safety.

To date, I've used it on several different occasions, including through the recent cold snaps. It's primarily been during the evening, although I also recently tested it during the day as I chose to work from the living room. With the heating off, it took the chill off the air and made for a more pleasant experience.

Using it really is simple, with no smoke generated it stays clean and is easy to dust and wipe over when actually cleaning, unlike cleaning log burner glass which is a more arduous task.

Results

With each use, the comments from myself and my sons regarding the amount of heat it produces have increased. Our traditional Christmas Eve viewing of Polar Express was absolutely enhanced by being able to watch it with the fire burning, and it also received full approval from our new dog who happily lay down in front of the fire and fell asleep. I used around 850ml of fuel on this night and we had around 2 hours and 45 minutes of burn time which was perfect.

The warmth radiates into the room, and when the door is closed and the fire is on, there's a noticeable difference when you walk into the room. Although I wasn't expecting to be this enamoured by its performance, I think it's safe to say it's definitely been a great addition to my home heating.

Final verdict

Based on pure facts, it's important to realise that the affect it has on your heating really does come down to the size of space you are trying to heat – as is the case with any stove or fireplace such as when working out what size wood burner do I need.

I have an open plan kitchen living room and dining space that is relatively small. Therefore, I didn't choose a stove based on output as I knew I was purely adding it as supplementary heat source. But also, I wanted a stove that was fairly compact in size, so it didn't take up too much space – and the Arada Hamlet Solution 5 turned out to be ideal for this.

Plus, when in use for a longer period of time, the Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove has certainly raised the temperature in the space, according to my Hive monitor. While it might struggle in a much larger room, the stove's heat output is decent – perhaps akin to a gas fire – if you are considering one for a smaller space.

There's no doubt that aesthetically it's added a cosy and stylish dimension to my living room area. The range of colours make it suitable for all different styles of interiors, with the added benefit that if I move, it's transportable and would work equally well elsewhere. It would be a great addition to snug room ideas or perfect in a home office set up too.

As previously mentioned, the body of the stove does get warm and so touching the exterior is not recommended when it's in use or until it cools down. However, this means it is also radiating heat into the room which makes the performance better.

I'm also planning on purchasing a stove fan soon to see if this adds to it's performance. If you're wondering what is a stove fan, they are stand-alone units that sit on top of a stove and use the heat of the stove to generate their own power which turns the blades of the fans and distribute heat around a room. The best stove fans will work on most types of stoves, including bioethanol stoves so I'm keen to see if it makes any difference to how far the heat circulates.

In terms of negatives, I've personally struggled to find any in my situation. This hot pink model might not be a cheap off the shelf solution so if you're perhaps looking for a budget option this might not be for you, but if you're keen on purchasing a good quality bioethanol stove that will last and help heat a smaller space where you can't add a gas, wood burner or multi-fuel stove, I'd certainly recommend considering the Arada Hamlet Solution 5 Bioethanol Stove.

As someone who struggles with allergies and shares a home with two furry friends, I was on the hunt for a solution to improve the air quality in my space.

Enter the Dyson air purifier – a sleek device promising to filter out allergens, odours, and airborne pollutants.

After years of use, I can confidently say it’s been a game-changer for my breathing and my home’s environment. But is it worth the price tag? Here's my take.

How does the Dyson air purifier work?

The Dyson air purifier, which is currently nearly £100 off for Amazon's Black Friday sale, works by inhaling your room's air through the small circular holes and processing it through its filtration system.

Its filtration system supposedly captures 99.95% of microscopic particles, including common allergens like pollen, dust, and mould spores, which is important for me as I have allergies to dust and pets. This I have found to be hugely beneficial and I've definitely had fewer allergic reactions with the Dyson air purifier running, even though my dogs continue to roam the house.

I also have family members with cystic fibrosis so ensuring as little dangerous air impurities as possible is a must, and with an additional activated carbon layer of protection this further reduces airborne irritants that could exacerbate respiratory issues. I can't say whether this has helped them though.

The purifier includes 10 speed settings, allowing me to adjust the airflow intensity with '10' being almost like a hairdryer and '1' being nearly an unnoticeable breeze.

It's probably also worth pointing out that similar models with similar tech, like the upgraded Dyson Hot & Cold Fan Heater also are on offer for Black Friday with £50 off at John Lewis.

How I choose to use it?

I choose to leave the purifier on overnight next to my bed as my allergies tend to hit me most in the morning and since I have got the Dyson air purifier I have noticed less allergy symptoms, such as a blocked nose or watery eyes.

They haven't completely stopped but it is a notable difference. Leaving it on overnight also doesn't disrupt my sleep either with its quiet operation whilst in its 'nighttime' mode.

The purifier will instantly blow fresh clean air in any direction you wish but it can also swivel in 45° or a 90° motion. This will normally cool down my bedroom (10ftx12ft) in 10-15 minutes.

As it's in my bedroom I only leave it running at night so it doesn't increase my electricity bill too much but it could be left on all day for those that find they need it.

Changing the filter is incredibly easy

I didn't want a product that requires constant maintenance, which is why Dyson's easy-to-replace air filter made this purifier ideal for me.

The HEPA air purifier filter cost £17.99 on Amazon and Dyson recommends you replace this annually, although I found the purifier worked fine 18 months after getting it and never once replacing the filter.

But when I did replace it it couldn't have been more straightforward. Simply pressing the two buttons on either side lifts the fan, take the filter cage out and swap the new filter in for the old, and voilà, done.

Remote control for switching settings

The Dyson air purifier also comes with a remote control for handling the purifier from around the room.

With this you can alter the speed, turn on night-time mode for when you're about to sleep, set a timer for how long you want the purifier on for, control whether you want the purifier to swivel or set it to 'auto' for a low speed, comfort setting.

One slight drawback is these settings can only be done using the controller, which I have to say has got lost on a few occasions, so I could only manually turn it on and had to go without the other features. Although this feature has been fixed with newer models, such as the Dyson Formaldehyde Air Purifier's remote, which can magnetically be stuck onto the purifier so it isn't lost.

Other Dyson air purifiers on the market include other features such as the Dyson Purifier Hot and Cool Purifier Fan that can blow hot air as well as cold and can be controlled by an app but for the additional cost (£540.55) and the same air purifying performance, I didn't feel this was worth it for me personally.

This Dyson air purifier is currently on sale on Amazon down from a RRP of £499.99 to £355.32, which is significantly lower than the Dyson Formaldehyde Tower Fan, which costs £499, and only has slightly more power in its fan.

Overall, I have found the Dyson to be extremely helpful with my allergies and it remains a permanent feature of my bedroom which I doubt I'll be replacing anytime soon.

As a keen DIYer and amateur carpenter I am regularly measuring to make sure I get the perfect cut and size, which can get extremely repetitive.

"Measure twice, cut once" is a mantra I've often used when doing my projects, so having a tool that can make this easier was a must-have.

So when I saw the REEKON Tomahawk professional digital laser tape measure I quickly realised how useful it could be, but I didn't expect it to be quite as useful as it turned out.

How does it work?

The T1 Tomahawk, which can be bought on Amazon for £229, works quite differently to your standard tape measure.

The dots underneath the tape tell the T1 the length it has been drawn out by and duel sensors inside the tape register any errors with the tape in case it becomes damaged in anyway.

Plus, if you're measuring in a tight space and need to include the tape measure body in your measurement, the T1 Tomahawk will automatically calculate the length of the tape measure into the measurement by clicking the 'toggle back' setting.

Capable of saving 500 measurements

Previously when measuring I would keep a notebook or scrap block of wood to keep track of what measurements I needed.

But the T1 Tomahawk removes that need with all my measurements being saved on the device itself. You then just click to see them on the digital display. So there's no more wondering how to read a tape measure or what that diamond on a tape measure means.

The T1 Tomahawk saves up to 500 measurements – plenty of capacity – meaning it is unlikely that the user will ever need to worry about keeping paper records of what's been measured.

What's also handy is that measurements can be taken in millimeters, centimeters, inches or feet as well as being able to easily convert them between different units of measurement on your display screen.

Additionally, with its Bluetooth connection you can easily connect the T1 to your phone by downloading the Reekon Tools Rock Jobsite app to keep your measurements stored elsewhere.

Laser function makes drawing lines easy

Another function of the T1 Tomahawk is the built-in green laser that makes aligning surfaces and marking straight lines simple.

If you're measuring a curved surface and want to know the length of it you can use the laser function to find the edge by lining it up with the laser.

The laser function points in the direction of the tape measure and once the T1 finds the center point for you (another handy function) you can hold the T1 in place and draw a line to show the cutting line down the centre.

This is a unique innovation not currently seen elsewhere in the market.

Large magnetic blade that makes measuring easier

One of the most practical features of the T1 tomahawk is it large, magnetic blade, capable of sticking to, or holding up objects.

The blade, or hook, is more than twice the size of other tape measures meaning it is easier to hold onto the ends of what I am sizing up.

Reekon will also replace these blades if they ever become damaged, although this is unlikely as the blades, as well as the entire tape measure, is extremely sturdy with rubber coating across most surfaces.

Holster makes storage simple

There's also a holster to carry the T1 Tomahawk around in, with a locking system to make sure it doesn't fall out easily.

The case is very much needed as this is a far heavier tape measure than any I've used, but this is understandable due to its many features and 25 foot tape length.

But if you don't want to use the case (often I wouldn't) then you can use the hook that's on the tape measure to easily store it or hang on your belt or pocket.

How does it compare to more traditional tape measures?

Standard tape measures with manual pulls tend to be cheaper, don't require batteries and are simpler to use, so why have I swapped these for the T1?

Simply put, the T1 Tomahawk does everything quicker and makes doing my projects faster and more precise as it reduces human error during measuring.

Plus its Bluetooth capability and e-paper display removes the headache of taking note of each measurement and I can be sure the accuracy is always within 0.5mm either way, more accurate than I could ever make it with a regular tape measure.

Additionally, standard tape measures typically have lengths around 5 metres, such as the TEFCOL Retractable Tape Measure, which is available on Amazon for £6.99, but the T1 Tomahawk comes in at 7.62 metres, so is larger than most tape measures on the market.

Final verdict

Switching to the Reekon T1 Tomahawk Digital Tape Measure has been a game-changer for me. Yes, it's on the pricey side, but the time and frustration it saves have already made up for the cost.

If you don't make regular measurements and aren't constantly doing DIY you may not see the full benefits of the T1 Tomahawk and a standard tape measure will do everything you need.

But if you're like me and you're constantly in the workshop then the T1 is well worth the purchase and will mean you'll never need to buy any other tape measure again as they simply cannot live up to the T1.

In summary, the REEKON T1 Tomahawk Digital Tape Measure has genuinely revolutionised the measuring experience for me.

While its higher price might deter casual users with more common tape measures like the Stanley tape measure, available for just £5.49 on Amazon, being more suitable for their needs, the precision, time-saving convenience, and advanced features it offers make it a powerful tool for those who frequently work on projects.

If you're looking to elevate your tool kit with a digital tape measure that combines technology and durability, the T1 Tomahawk is well worth the investment.

There's something about the changing of the seasons that dampens my spirits. Even though we may not have had endless days of summer sunshine, waking up to daylight and evenings that approach gradually, rather than abruptly as they do in winter, helps lighten my mood.

And while getting outside in the daylight does help, working full-time doesn't always allow for this every day – and neither does the weather. But, can artificial daylight ever be a true replacement for natural light? Medical experts officially claim it can, and those with an official SAD diagnosis can even claim VAT relief on light therapy products.

So, while I may not have a diagnosis, anything that makes the short winter days seem more bearable, is worth a shot, which is why I chose to review the newest offering from Lumie, inventors of the first wake up lamp.

Shop for the Lumie Dash light therapy lamp

How SAD lamps work

According to the NHS website: "The exact cause of SAD is not fully understood, but it's often linked to reduced exposure to sunlight during the shorter autumn and winter days. The main theory is that a lack of sunlight might stop a part of the brain called the hypothalamus working properly, which may affect the:

• Production of melatonin – melatonin is a hormone that makes you feel sleepy; in people with SAD, the body may produce it in higher than normal levels
• Production of serotonin – serotonin is a hormone that affects your mood, appetite and sleep; a lack of sunlight may lead to lower serotonin levels, which is linked to feelings of depression
• Body's internal clock (circadian rhythm) – your body uses sunlight to time various important functions, such as when you wake up, so lower light levels during the winter may disrupt your body clock and lead to symptoms of SAD."

While a number of treatments are suggested, light therapy is one of them.

Artificial daylight or light therapy lamps, such as another Lumie product, the Lumie Vitamin L light from Amazon, work by basically replicating daylight, thus allowing you to boost your exposure when you can't naturally access sunlight.

“Portable bright light devices allow you to boost your light levels wherever you are during the day which will have positive effects on how you sleep and how you feel when you are awake,” says Dr Victoria Revell, Associate Professor in Translational Sleep & Circadian Physiology at the Surrey Sleep Research Centre.

First impressions

Neat, compact, minimal in design and with a good sized light surface, my first impressions of the Lumie Dash lamp are positive. It looks less sterile than some of the other light therapy lamps available, such as this simply named SAD lamp from Amazon, and is available in two fairly neutral colours (Terracotta Pink and Pistachio White) which make it easy to slot into most interiors.

As my home office set up is in my bedroom which is based on neutral bedroom ideas, I opted for the Pistachio White – although either would have worked from an aesthetic point of view.

It arrived in an easy to open box, with no complicated instruction manual which could be reassuring if you're concerned a light with medical benefits may be difficult to use. A simple three step picture-led message on the front of the instruction leaflet demonstrates how to use it, with the remainder of information inside simply safety instructions in a multitude of different languages.

Specifications and set up

Light is measured in a unit called Kelvins which relates to the temperature of the light. In general, midday daylight sits around the 6500K level. However, the general tool of light measurement for SAD lamps is known as Lux. For a light to mimic daylight, it needs to offer at least 10,000 Lux. To get the most benefit from the lux, each lamp will usually provide a distance at which this lux is achieved.

One other important element of these lights is their ability to improve how we actually 'see things'. This is determined by what's known as a colour rendering index and the better the score, the more accurate representation you have of how objects actually appear.

On both counts, the Lumie Dash lamp meets the required standards, boasting a 10,000 lux level at 15cm distance, as well as a colour rendering index (CRI) of CRI-95+. As well as matching the daylight specification, the CRI rating will help reduce eye strain, and is great if you're involved in any work that requires close-up activity.

Setting up the Dash lamp

As mentioned, setting up the Dash lamp is child's play. It's simply a case of unpacking the box, plugging in the mains lead, plugging it into the wall and switching it on via a touch operated dimmer switch on the front of the base. Pressing plus or minus increases or decreases the intensity of the light as you'd expect.

Using the Lumie Dash lamp

With regards to using the Lumie Dash lamp, this is perhaps where some extra guidance on the instructions or the box as to how to use it would have been beneficial. While there is plenty of information available online about how best to use light therapy lamps, having some Lumie Dash specific instructions or suggestions would help someone who was new to light therapy, and add to Lumie's trusted credentials as an expert in the field.

That said, as I was testing the light without an official diagnosis, and more to see if some extra exposure to daylight would make me less 'miserable', I decided to start by setting it up on my desk and using it for periods throughout the working day. It should however be noted that even though it may be tempting to use it later in the evening when the darkness really has set in, using light therapy after 5pm is not advised as this will affect your natural circadian rhythm meaning you struggle to get to sleep and end up even more tired the next day.

As per the general guidelines available on line, I placed it on the elevated part of my desk riser, although it was around 40cm away rather than the 15cm recommended, turned it to face me and switched it on around 8.30am when I started work. As it wasn't as close to my face, I did then leave it on for around 2 hours or more, adjusting the brightness if it started to bother me or turning it off when the natural light outside increased.

Post lunchtime, I found myself switching it back on again for a while and then turning it off again once it felt right. After a few weeks of following this routine, I then decided to switch things around and use it in a different way.

Stage two of testing involved moving the Lumie Dash from my desk to my bedside table, so that rather than switching on my bedside lamp when I woke, I instead switched on the Lumie Dash lamp.

I didn't immediately switch it on at full strength as I'm the kind of person who likes to lie in bed for a while before I actually get up. Instead, I gradually increased the lamp's intensity over a period of 10-20 minutes. Then, once awake, left it at maximum level while getting ready.

Results

Was I expecting an immediate change in mood from the first day I used the lamp? A little part of me probably was, although I knew from research that it was likely to take longer. What was immediate was a comment from a colleague on a video call that I looked well. It's true that the colour rendering and natural daylight certainly cast a far more pleasant light on my face – something worth bearing in mind if you do start your day with a video call in a poorly lit room.

As I was using the Lumie Dash while I worked, meaning it was to the side of my laptop and thus in the corner of my eye, I also found I had to play around with the brightness levels quite a lot to get it at the most comfortable level. However, it provided more than enough light to work by and even when it was particularly low light outside, my working area and indeed room felt well lit making it a good candidate if you're looking for different ways of lighting a home office.

Did I eventually feel less like I was struggling with SAD? It took around a week to 10 days, but then I did find myself feeling more alert when working, and, interestingly, I found myself looking forward to switching the Lumie Dash on each day. Clearly my brain was catching on to the fact it was going to help, even before I necessarily realised it was benefitting me. As the weeks passed, I certainly stopped feeling less upset about the fact it was Autumn, and even when it's been gloomy outside, I've simply acknowledged it rather than feeling depressed by it. Getting that boost of daylight early on in the day, and leaving it on for longer at a reduced level has helped the overall low levels of light seem more bearable. Now, I only really complain about the dark once the evening sets in – something which light therapy won't help as it's not advisable to use it at night.

However, I think the real impact has been in the last two weeks when I've switched to using it on my bedside table when I wake up. As someone who struggles with sleep, often experiencing mild bouts of insomnia and lacking the ability to fall back asleep if I wake up too early, it can usually take a while to feel alert.

That feeling has practically disappeared. If I've woken earlier than required, I've put the Lumie Dash on, and if I've woken to the alarm, I've done the same. In every instance, even if I initially feel groggy, within 5-10 minutes I'm fully awake and ready to get out of bed. I don't even have to give myself a nudge, it just feels like it's time to get up and so I do. That's not to say I haven't stayed in bed longer on the weekend if I can, of course I have, but the Lumie Dash goes on when I wake and stays on until I get up, at which point natural daylight can be allowed in through my shutters.

Such has been the impact, that I haven't even moved it back to my desk for an afternoon boost, although I'm certainly planning on doing so as we head more into winter months and we get even less daylight.

Final verdict

Although I initially set out to test the Lumie Dash while working, there are a few design features of the lamp that for me, make it less suitable for certain types of work. Its rigid design, with no moveable features mean it's perhaps not as flexible for those working at a laptop or computer. However, if you were working at desk level, perhaps drawing or making items, it would undoubtedly provide you with a clear and accurate light source. But, even though the light is angled, when working with a screen, I found it harder to get it at face level, or at the right angle.

Having tested the Lumie Task lamp in a previous job, which does have movement in the arm and lamp head, the Task feels perhaps more suitable for the work that I do. But, that said, there's no denying the Lumie Dash had a positive impact on my well-being, during the time that I used it. And, the fact it is compact and light in weight means its easy to move around the home if you like to work from different locations throughout the week.

Its most positive results however have been achieved though by moving to become part of my bedroom lighting ideas, and using it on waking. A DIY version of a wake-up lamp like the Lumie Bodyclock Rise 100, but it's DIY that has definitely reaped rewards, and a method that I plan on continuing to use over the coming months until early and stronger daylight returns to the UK.

Its simple design means it doesn't look out of place as a bedside lamp, and although I've left my current one also in place, this is so I can use that one at night time.

And, as a final note, as previously mentioned, a simple set of guidance notes on how to use the lamp would be a great addition to a well priced, aesthetically pleasing and easy to use light therapy lamp that I feel fulfilled it's promise of making me feel less 'SAD'. Would I recommend it? Yes.

Looking at other ways of alleviating SAD? In the same way getting the light right is benefcial, colour also plays an important role in wellbeing during the winter months, says Ronseal’s in-house colour expert, Chris White and clinical psychologist, Dr. Gurpreet Kaur.

"It is well known that colour impacts mood. For example, lighter colours, such as white or other light shades, can reflect more natural light and create brighter living spaces, which can help to improve general mood”.

“Warm colour shades such as yellows and oranges are great for brightening up a space," says Chris White, "but they also can help with stress-reduction. Brighter tones like pinks and reds also can have the same effect but should be used more sparingly to avoid overpowering a space.

“Natural colours including greens and blues also help with mood-boosting through their associations with being outdoors and among nature," he adds.

For more ways to improve your lighting, follow our guide to lighting design, and try these green bedroom ideas to help bring the outdoors into your sleep space.

As a light sleeper, I was a little sceptical that I would sleep through a dehumidifier working all night in my bedroom. But, with single glazing meaning I also have a big problem with window condensation, I'm also aware it's not healthy to sleep in an environment that is creating mould on my window frames.

While most dehumidifiers operate at a fairly low decibel level, I chose to test one that is certified by the Quiet Mark association as I hoped that would give me the lowest noise option available. In addition, the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier has a sleep setting and I was keen to see what additional benefits this offered over simply choosing a lower fan setting.

And of course, I was also keen to see just how much moisture it would remove from my room each night while I slept. Would it make a noticeable difference or would I still need to use a window vacuum to removing any remaining condensation?

Initial impressions

There's little point trying to wax lyrical about the aesthetics of dehumidifiers as ultimately they are practical products designed to serve a purpose. As they are unlikely ever to win style awards, the less unobtrusive they are the better, and the MeacoDry ABC 12L Dehumidifier answers the brief well.

It arrived clearly packaged and wasn't heavy to carry. I live in a flat which is accessed via a flight of stairs, with another to my bedroom, so given it's identified on the Meaco website as suitable for flats, it was good to see it was easily transportable if you didn't live on the ground floor.

In terms of appearance, the image on the box shows it to have a fairly standard white exterior, a simple Meaco logo on the front and a black top with clearly defined buttons and an LCD display.

The white plug and cable I found on opening the dehumidifier was also pleasing as white always feels easier to blend with an interior. Although I did question the need for a see through section on the water container on the rear of the dehumidifier. It seemed somewhat pointless given it couldn't be viewed from the front and has an auto-off function when the water tank is full. My only other initial concern was with the single in-built carrying handle. While unobtrusive, it felt unbalanced when carrying it as it naturally tilts forward.

MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier specifications

The MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier may be a smaller model, than others with larger extraction power such as the ProBreeze 20L dehumidifier, but still comes with an impressive list of features.

• Dimensions: H 463mm x W 300mm x D 250mm
• Weight: 10.4kg
• Moisture removal: Up to 12L / day
• Type: Compressor
• Noise level: 36 dB and Quiet Mark certified
• Water tank capacity: 2.6 L
• Recommended room size: Flats or 1-3 bedroomed houses
• Drainage: Tank or continuous but hose not included
• Filters: Washable dust filter
• Extras: Sleep mode, child lock, laundry mode, timer, automatic defrost, auto-off

How I used the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier

Based on the 'easy as ABC' principle, I wondered if setting up the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier would be simple. It's recommended you leave it stand for 6 hours before the first use, and if using in a bedroom, Meaco recommend not placing it at the end of the bed, just in case it gets obstructed by bedding or bed furniture.

As I didn't set it up early enough, I wasn't able to test the dehumidifier overnight on the first use. However, even though I'd missed the perfect opportunity to use it on a cold night, it did mean when I woke up my windows were covered in condensation and I could put it to immediate use.

Unpacking the item was easy and a printed instruction manual is included which is uncomplicated and easy to follow. Each part is clearly identified in the manual along with a full breakdown of how each button works. As the filter is already in place (but removable for dehumidifier maintenance and cleaning), it simply is a case of waiting 6 hours and then switching it on.

Setting humidity levels

The unit offers two ways of reducing humidity. First is a continuously on (CO)mode which means it will continue extracting moisture until you switch it off. If using the unit to dry laundry, the CO mode is recommended. The second option is to choose a desired humidity level and once you've reached that level, the unit will auto switch-off, testing the air every 30 minutes after that point and starting again if required.

As I'd not used a dehumidifier in my bedroom for some time, I opted for the higher fan setting and CO mode until the windows were cleared. Since that first use, I've also tested it during the day using the humidity setting which is simply activated by pressing the humidity button to rise in increments of 5% until you reach your chosen number.

The recommended level for normal humidity in a house is 50 - 55%rh and as I live in a listed building with single glazing, even on warmer autumn days, the humidity level is usually above this. Subsequently I've also been using the dehumidifier to keep this at an acceptable level during the day.

Activating the sleep mode

In order to access the sleep mode – the main reason I was looking to test this model – it's simply a case of switching it on and then holding down the timer button for 2 seconds which turns on the sleep function.

But what does the sleep mode do? It's designed to make the user experience more comfortable at night, which means it automatically removes all lights from the display, switches it into low fan mode and the unit won't beep if the water container fills up.

I also chose to use the CO humidity setting while asleep as I wanted to leave it on all night to see if I could both sleep through it, and wake up with dry windows. This means I've had it in sleep mode from around 11pm until 6.30am the following morning.

Testing other functions

And finally, although I tested the DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier for drying laundry, I've also used the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier with my wet washing to see how the laundry mode stacked up.

Results

Over eight weeks into testing and I'm still finding the MeacoDry ABC 12 L dehumidifier a valuable tool in my battle against bedroom window condensation. It continues to perform exactly as it says it will. Each setting works correctly, and ease of use really is as 'easy as ABC'.

Did I sleep and wake to clear windows?

As a light sleeper, waking easily if disturbed, I went into testing assuming that I'd be jumping out of bed in frustration to turn off the dehumidifier. Despite having other models in the house, I've never slept with one in my room before – mainly because I'd convinced myself I couldn't.

However, I was pleasantly surprised on both the first and all subsequent nights I've used the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier, even to the extent that I feel it's possibly improved my sleep. As I live in a town centre, the night time weekend noise can be disruptive, but the dehumidifier has almost acted like a white noise machine, helping to drown out the street noise.

When I first switched it on, I was a little alarmed as it made a relatively loud humming noise, but it quickly settled. This seems to happen every time you switch it on, but it lasts only a few seconds. Then the standard dehumidifier hum kicks in.

I'll admit to lying there for a little while on the first night, wondering if it would keep me awake, but clearly not. I've also been able to go back to sleep easily if I've woken. In terms of it passing this particular test, it certainly has.

My son has also had it in his bedroom as part of the testing and again, there have been no issues with sleep and he's woken to clear windows.

Have my condensation levels improved?

As the first round of testing involved seeing how well the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier could remove a night's worth of condensation from two large sash windows with slatted shutters, it felt like it might be a big ask for a smaller model. However, it was more than up to the job. Within a couple of hours they were clear.

On those nights that the weather forecast has indicated a drop in temperature and I've used it in sleep mode, every morning I've woken to clear windows with no condensation. One night when I forgot to switch it on, it was an entirely different case and I was back to windows running with moisture. But, it's done its duty once switched on, and even with a drop in temperature has continued to remove the condensation.

Wondering if temperature affects performance? "The size of a dehumidifier primarily determines how much water it can extract, not how well it performs in cold temperatures," says Chris Michael, managing director of Meaco. "In a cold room, a larger compressor dehumidifier will outperform a smaller one thanks to its greater power. However, if the room temperature falls below 15°C, a desiccant dehumidifier is the better option."

As my home office is also in my bedroom, as previously noted, I've also used it during the day to help improve the overall humidity levels. This has had the added benefit of making the room feel warmer too – a huge bonus with single glazing one of the main reasons for heat loss in a house and the cause of my rising energy bills.

The tank hasn't been full in the morning, although has needed emptying daily. And, as with other models tested, once it's full, removing it from the unit invariably sees a small amount splashing out onto the floor from the container. Not enough to be considered a problem, but worth noting if you're using a bedroom where carpet is the most common floor covering.

Did it work for drying laundry?

There's very little in the difference between the ability of the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier and the DeLonghi DEX212F Tascugio AiraDry model I tested when it comes to drying laundry.

However, although the water tank on the MeacoDry is larger, which means slightly less emptying, the DeLonghi dehumidifier does make the landing area where I dry my clothes warmer when the laundry setting is on, meaning it also dries the clothes a little quicker too.

Using them both to dry laundry, also led me to ask some further questions about how these two models stack up when compared at night. While I haven't tested the DeLonghi model in my room, I have been using it in my son's room at night. He's also had a lot of respiratory problems this year which is why I'm keen to eradicate the mould on window frames that has started to appear.

Meaco vs DeLonghi

When it comes to standard review criteria, the Delonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry dehumidifier and the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier have a few similarities. Both extract up to 12L of extraction, operate as low as 36dB, have a laundry mode, varying fan speeds and auto switch off.

However, it's when it comes to use at night, or even during the day to reduce humidity, where the differences appear. While the MeacoDry can be put into continuous mode, the Delonghi model doesn't have this option. It also doesn't have a humidty reading display to let you choose your desired humidity level. Although the instructions explain how in low fan mode it's attempting to achieve 60% humidity, this means once that's achieved, it switches off until the level rises again.

What's happened with the DeLonghi model is that on several occasions, the dehumidifier has switched off during the night having achieved the desired level, and then not turned back on until it's close to morning. The result being that there is still condensation on the windows.

I suspect the shutters prevent the humidity level from rising too much in the bedroom and re-activating the dehumidifier, which is good in terms of the air in the bedroom being fresher than I thought, but less so regarding the long-term build up of condensation and mould.

The DeLonghi model also costs more to buy and run. Meaco states that the cost for the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier is 4p / hour based on 24.50p / kWh, while the DeLonghi model reviewed earlier this year came in at 8p / hour.

So, while there's little difference in noise and I could easily sleep with both, the fact the MeacoDry can be made to stay on all night would get my vote for bedrooms where condensation is an overnight issue.

Final verdict

Is the MeacoDry ABC 12L dehumidifier worthy of a place in our best dehumidifiers buying guide as the best dehumidifier for bedrooms? For me, it's a yes. It achieved full marks on all the tests I set of it. I slept, I woke to clear windows and it's relatively low cost to run – even when left on all night. And, a couple of months in and I still have no complaints.

Is it as whisper quiet as I thought it would be given the decibel level and Quiet Mark recognition? Possibly not, but given 40dB is the average sound of a refrigerator, 36dB is not far off this level. In hindsight, perhaps my expectations didn't take into account that while a refrigerator sound is muffled by cupboards and general kitchen noise, 36dB in bedroom with nothing blocking the sound is always going to seem a little louder at first.

Will it be a valuable addition to preventing mould in the bedroom during the winter? Of that I have no doubt and would have no hesitation in recommending it for helping it to reduce humidity in a house.

When my family moved into our current home, which was originally built around 1988, it had an oil heating system, electric storage heaters and a wet radiator system that had been retrofitted into the property in 2004 by previous owners.

However, when we decided to extend the property we were faced with a decision as the oil boiler pipework and flue were sited where the new lounge would be. Either the oil boiler needed to move or an alternative heating solution had to be considered.

Given the age of the boiler and the awkward position of the oil tank, we decided to explore fitting air source heat pumps (ASHP) and chose a Mitsubishi Ecodan 11.2kw R410a monobloc heat pump.

Although the one we fitted is now two generations old and operates using an older refrigerant – R410a – the new updated model, the Ecodan R32 is still very similar in its size, look and operation to the one I have.

First impressions

The unit we chose is classed as a monobloc heat pump. ASHPs are not traditionally pretty things to look at and ours, albeit a cream colour that slightly blends with the wall, is a big unit and takes the space of about three wheelie bins. It also needs free space of around one to two metres in front of it to allow for air movement.

The ASHP extracts heat from air that is drawn in through a heat exchanger by a fan. This action has a sound implication, albeit this unit is still surprisingly quiet despite its age. We have never heard it, even though it is only around two metres from habitable rooms.

Installation

Prior to install, remember that ASHP units in theory need planning permission, but can usually be installed under permitted development, if all the conditions and sound calculations are met. However, it is always advisable to check with your local authority before proceeding.

To find out more you can also check the planning portal for the latest information.

You will also need permission from the Distribution Network Operator (DNO) to electrically connect the heat pump. Some installers do this application for you but often it is left to the homeowner to complete.

Installation and connection

With air source heat pump installation, the positioning is important. The outdoor fan unit needs to sit on a firm base. We had to build a brick base with two concrete slabs on top, as well as drainage for the condensation that is produced by the unit before it was installed. Between 70 litres and 120 litres of condensation can be produced per day so this needs to be managed to prevent it from saturating the surrounding area or becoming a slip hazard in colder weather.

I built my own base and it needed a small foundation as it was on grass. Concrete slabs might also have been acceptable if the ground was properly compacted.

If you are using the ASHP for hot water preparation then you will also need a hot water cylinder. Our oil boiler was a combi unit so we had no hot water cylinder and therefore had to plan a space for this to be added.

Up until now, a hot water cylinder that is designed for a boiler has not been compatible with a heat pump, but some of the new R290 refrigerant units can be used with some indirect cylinders. Check with your installer to see what options are available.

When the unit arrived, the packaging was all cardboard including the compacted base. It was easy enough to unpack the boxing from around the unit but the fan unit needed four people to carry it comfortably. There were four handles recessed into the case but a set of straps carefully fed under the unit also helped with the safe lifting and shifting.

In terms of timing, our installation took around 4 days, but good planning meant we were only without hot water for less than a day.

Connection to heating system

Connecting the ASHP unit and water cylinder to the existing central heating and hot water distribution took some additional pipework and disruption.

Routes had to be found for the pipework and insulation as well as the electrical supply and controls wiring. It was certainly not a ‘kit’ installation but the installer supplied all the additional materials and had all the plumbing and electrical competencies within the installation team to complete the job.

Our extension has underfloor heating and the rest of the home is on radiators. The installer did a room by room heat loss calculation before starting the installation so that all the emitters in each room could be carefully sized according to the room heat loss and the flow temperature of the heat pump.

We were fortunate that only two radiators needed to be replaced as the rest were all suitable for the heat pump design configuration.

A heat pump can work with radiators, hydronic fan convectors or underfloor heating, so as long as they have been designed for the lower flow temperatures and have also been balanced for a much smaller difference between the flow temperature and the return temperature in the heating system (than you would expect in a boiler driven system), there's no reason why the system won't work.

We were also fortunate that all the central heating pipework was already made up of copper 22mm and 15mm pipes. Small bore pipes such as 8mm and 10mm can be a limiting factor when installing an ASHP as they often cannot transfer enough energy in the water without an increase in noise, or a drop in efficiency, or both.

Performance

At the time I had it installed, the Mitsubishi Ecodan was the biggest selling ASHP in England. As such the performance was around where I expected it to be. That said, the performance was not at the headline figures that are thrown around on social media. But to my mind, they were in the range expected when you took into account the flow temperature, temperature difference and the ambient temperature.

It's important to note there is also a difference between the calculated efficiency and the metered efficiency. I had a Metering and Monitoring Service Package (MMSP) fitted which meters the heat generated and the electricity used so that you can get a far better idea of the Coefficient of Performance (COP) rating which works on the basis that the higher the reading, the more efficient the heat pump is.

To be honest, I felt that the materials supplied for this were rather sub-standard. The sensors did not fit in the pockets provided and the fittings provided were exactly what the manufacturer said should not be used. However, the MMSP at least gives some indication of heat delivered and electricity used in the actual home - rather than a formulaic guestimate – which is all you will get with calculated efficiency.

The heating and hot water is not measured separately and the COP on average over the past five years is just under three. However, this does include periods where I was playing with settings to see how they worked – rather than concentrating on optimising performance.

Impact on heating bills

At the time when we decided to install the ASHP the alternative fuel option – oil – was very cheap. Electricity was less so, so the initial running cost of the system was higher than oil.

However, after we got used to the ASHP system and started to understand how it reacted to heating demand and environmental conditions, we were able to adjust things more effectively.

We also had to realise that we used to buy oil once a year in one lump sum and now all the heating, cooking, lighting, games consoles and other electrical appliances were all bundled into one big bill, so while one number dropped, another increased. But, over time we have learnt to adjust.

Environmental friendliness

The heat pump that I have is now two generations old even though it has only been in for around five years.

However, this means that it is already using refrigerant that is considered less environmentally friendly than newer editions. The Mitsubishi Ecodan 11.2kw heat pump uses R410a, which was replaced by R32 due to lower Global Warming Potential (GWP), but even that is also now in the process of being replaced with R290, which has an even lower GWP.

Costs

The Boiler Upgrade Scheme (BUS) has muddied the water on heat pump and air source heat pump costs in general. The scheme pays £7500 towards the cost of the installation of the heat pump, but this can unfortunately lead to price increases from some suppliers.

The cost you pay will depend on a number of things such as how many radiators are changed, how much pipework is changed, what extras you need such as a heat pump base, making good where interior finishes have been disrupted and the distance that the pipework needs to cover.

An air source heat pump will usually cost between £6000 and £14,000 (less the £7500) but with disruptive remedial work, could end up costing you around £30,000 as a full project cost.

To benefit from the BUS, the installation must also be completed by a registered Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) installer, meaning the option to buy the equipment and install it yourself as a way of saving costs is currently not very viable.

Would I buy it again?

I hope to get at least around 15 years from the unit, and even though R410a is being phased out by reducing the amount of the gas available each year for sale, (the gas can still be purchased for maintenance purposes), the only time that mine would be redundant is if R410a was completely banned.

Historically other gasses have taken over 20 years before the gas was completely banned from date of restriction. That gives me another 10 to 15 years, which is over the expected lifespan of the unit. Compressors are often guaranteed for 10 years but have a life expectancy of 15 years.

If I was buying again, I would look at the same pump that operates using the R290 refrigerant. Even though it can be slightly less efficient and it is slightly trickier to install due to the fact that it is highly flammable. This means the process needs to be managed extremely safely in the highly unlikely event of a leak. it should be noted that there is a tiny volume of the gas in the unit – around 20 times less than some BBQ gas bottles.

The Black + Decker BCD700S1K-GB combi-drill is a beginner-friendly drill, with a lithium-ion battery enabling its cordless operation.

Featuring basic drilling, a screwdriver mode with 10 torque settings, and a hammer drill mode for drilling into brick and other hard materials, the BCD700S1K-GB promises to do everything a casual DIYer might need it to do. 

What’s more, the drill comes at a staggeringly low price. Bundles of the BCD700S1K-GB plus a lithium-ion battery, charger and plastic carry case are currently listed for £59.99 at Amazon UK – and we’ve seen that price dip below £50 during sale periods.

The battery and charger can be used with other 18V cordless tools from the Black + Decker ‘POWERCONNECT’ range, which includes other DIY must-haves such as sanders and jigsaws.

On paper, the BCD700S1K-GB looks like the perfect purchase for newcomers to DIY – but as we all know, a low price and lots of features can sometimes come at a cost to quality and performance. 

So, to find out whether Black + Decker’s tool really is one of the best drills for beginners, I put it to the test around my home, which I’m busy renovating. With the drill’s full feature set in mind, I tested it by driving screws and drilling into wood, plaster and brick. Read on to find out what I thought of the drill’s performance and design.

Where to buy the Black + Decker BCD700S1K-GB combi drill

What's included

The BCD700S1K-GB comes with a good range of accessories – but not quite everything you need:

• BCD700S combi drill
• 1.5Ah 18V lithium-ion battery
• Battery charger
• Plastic carry case
• Double-headed screwdriver bit
• Instruction booklet

Only one drill bit is included: a double-headed screwdriver bit for turning cross-head (Phillips) and flat-head screws.

You’ll need to purchase additional bits for other tasks, such as masonry drill bits for hammer-drilling into brick, or wood bits for drilling into wood. Buying a basic Black + Decker drill bit and screwdriver set for £15 on Amazon will probably cover most of your requirements.

It's worth noting that the drill’s chuck also has a 10 mm capacity, so wider drill bits (such as 13 mm bits) will not fit.

Performance

I tested the BCD700S1K-GB by using it to carry out a selection of basic DIY tasks around the home, assessing all of its settings and features in the process.

1. Uninstalling old screws 

The BCD700S1K-GB proved really effective at removing old screws from wood and plaster, including screws that had been tightly installed. 

To get the best out of the BCD700S1K-GB’s screwdriving mode, I made use of its range of ten torque settings, which can produce turning force up to 40 Nm. 

Torque can easily be adjusted using the numbered adjustment collar on the barrel of the drill. I found that the higher torque settings provided the necessary turning force to uninstall stubborn, old screws, while the lower torque settings caused noticeably less vibration – so they’re kinder on the hand. Most screws required only a low torque setting of ‘2’ or ‘3’. 

The chuck kept a really tight, stable hold on the screwdriver bit during screwdriving.

2. Installing new screws

Fixing new screws into wood and/or Rawl plugs is the BCD700S1K-GB’s specialty. With its screwdriver bit fitted, the drill turns screws with great control, or with decent power, depending on which speed setting you’re using. 

The BCD700S1K-GB really excels at tightening screws up, when they’re almost fully installed. With its strong, secure chuck gripping the bit, the BCD700S1K-GB tightens screws fantastically well, achieving a level of tightness that some higher-priced drills can’t match. 

3. Drilling holes in wood or plaster

When I used the BCD700S1K-GB to drill through wood (or a softer material such as plaster), the drill proved pretty effective and very controlled. Some other drills can bore through wood faster, but Black + Decker’s combi will work quickly enough for most casual DIY users. 

The BCD700S1K-GB also proved great at countersinking – where a mushroom-shaped countersinking bit is used to create a depression in wood, allowing a screw or other fixing to be hidden with filler. 

In my testing, the drill countersunk wood very easily, and more quickly than some of its premium competitors. To get that good effect, I was using the BCD700S1K-GB on its maximum speed settings.

4. Hammer-drilling holes in brick

During my testing, the BCD700S1K-GB proved capable of drilling holes in brick – but only just. I found that the drill took a very long time to drill into hard, old brickwork even though it was fitted with an appropriate masonry drill bit.

If your property has very hard bricks, then I wouldn’t recommend using the BCD700S1K-GB to drill into them, as you’ll expend a lot more time and effort than you need to. However, if the building has softer bricks, then the BCD700S1K-GB’s hammer drill function might be up to the task. 

5. Battery performance 

Battery charging and runtime are key to cordless combi drill performance – so I rated these aspects of my experience with the BCD700S1K-GB while testing its drilling and screwdriving capabilities. 

You’ll need to charge this drill’s lithium-ion battery before use. It slots easily into the charger, which has an LED indicator that shows the battery’s current charge state: full, charging, broken, or paused due to incorrect operating temperature. 

I found that the battery charged slowly, taking just under three hours to reach its 1.5Ah capacity. This could cause delays for users who are tackling big projects with their combi drill – so if that sounds like you, be sure to charge in advance of DIY work, or purchase the BCD700S1K-GB with two 1.5Ah batteries (£88.95, Amazon) so that you can keep both charged, ready for lengthier tasks.   

On a more positive note, the drill’s 1.5Ah battery demonstrated good runtime during our testing, providing power long enough for me to complete a modest DIY project (re-fitting a loft hatch), without requiring a re-charge. The battery only ran out after longer-duration testing of the BCD700S1K-GB’s hammer-drilling. 

Ease of use

With the BCD700S1K-GB, you get all the basic features you’d expect of a modern combi drill in a simple-to-use, unfussy product. These include:

• a keyless chuck
• two speed settings
• forward and reverse drilling
• a drill bit holder
• variable speed trigger

I found the drill particularly easy to use, without any unusual mechanisms or gimmicky features to master. A simple twist of the adjustment collar lets you choose between operating modes: drill, hammer drill, and ten torque settings for screwdriving.

Rotational direction can be easily changed with the same hand you’re using to hold the drill, using the selectors on the sides of the drill – which is very useful when you’re holding a screw in the other hand. Meanwhile, the variable speed trigger gives you some control over the drill’s RPM, with roughly three speeds within each of the two gears (as far as I could tell). 

This is a really nice drill to hold, with a soft, rubbery handle that’s shaped ergonomically to fit the user’s fingers. It’s a light, compact tool, weighing just 0.9 kg (or 1.3 kg with the battery fitted). If you tend to find drills too heavy or unwieldy, you might find a comfortable companion in the BCD700S1K-GB.

Switching between drill bits requires you to turn the keyless chuck with one hand, while holding the barrel above it with the other. This isn’t the most convenient method for changing the bit, but crucially, it provides a secure, reliable grip on the drill bit.

If you’ve used a combi drill before, you’ll easily master the BCD700S1K-GB - and I believe this would be an accessible drill for beginners to use too, thanks to its simple design and lightweight build. 

Who should buy it?

There are no innovative features here that’ll surprise or delight experienced drill users - so power tool fanatics should look elsewhere. 

Similarly, users who are tackling a very big DIY project such as a home renovation or house extension will probably require a combi drill that has more power (particularly for hammer-drilling) and faster battery charging. 

With that said, for beginners or occasional DIYers, the BCD700S1K-GB could be ideal. This drill has all the basic features that provide real benefit to the average user, such as multiple torque levels and speed settings.

The basic design of the drill is great for beginners too. Its secure chuck (meaning fewer dropped drill bits), compact form, ergonomic handle and relatively low power and vibration make this a very accessible drill for users who are just getting to grips with their first power tools.

Add the BCD700S1K-GB’s very cheap price and the bundled-in battery, charger and carry case, and there you have a recipe for the perfect bargain cordless combi drill for beginners.

Final verdict

I’m happy to recommend the Black + Decker BCD700S1K-GB to beginner DIYers who are looking for a great first drill, or occasional users who need an effective tool to help around the house. 

Unlike certain other cordless drill bundles priced around the £60 mark, Black + Decker’s package is actually fit for purpose. Its performance is pretty good, especially when it comes to screwdriving and drilling into softer materials like wood and plaster. And while the drill’s battery charges slowly, you’ll get enough runtime out of it to complete a run-of-the-mill, beginner-friendly DIY task. 

If you’re a DIY fanatic, you might want to spoil yourself by buying a more premium product from our roundup of the best cordless drills. But for users who just want an affordable, accessible tool to get stuff done, the Black + Decker BCD700S1K-GB cordless combi drill would be a fine choice. 

About this review and the reviewer 

Pete is a freelance writer and reviewer from Leeds, with work published by titles including The Guardian, BBC Good Food, The Independent and the London Evening Standard. A keen DIYer and home renovator, Pete frequently contributes reviews and how-to guides to Homebuilding & Renovating. Pete tested the Black + Decker BCD700S1K-GB by using it to drive screws and drill into wood, plaster and brick during a loft hatch refitting project.  

Since I purchased the Dry:Soon 3-Tier Heated Airer and cover from Lakeland around seven years ago I've been an advocate - even more so after moving to properties where drying clothes outside wasn't an option. 

Come rain or shine I've been happy in the knowledge that I could dry clothes without resorting to tumble driers or radiators. And even though there have been times when washing has taken longer to dry than I hoped, I've always extolled the benefits of owning one.

However, after reading consistently positive views about the benefits of using a dehumidifier to dry clothes, I was tempted to test the claims for myself.

After researching the best model for drying laundry, I settled on the De'Longhi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier as it has received positive reviews from both purchasers and other reviewers. 

First impressions

When the DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier arrived, although the box was heavier than I expected, it was easy to unpack and contained very little unnecessary packaging. 

The smooth moulded design, sage green trim and the discreet buttons and display also meant it looked less utilitarian than other models I'd seen. As someone easily enticed by aesthetics, I was pleasantly surprised at how stylish it was up close.

Although there's no escaping the fact dehumidifiers are practical appliances designed to remove moisture from the air to help with issues such damp, I'm a firm believer of style still being important - regardless of a product's purpose. 

Specification

The DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier has an impressive specification including certification by the Allergy Standards Foundation, approving it as suitable for people with asthma and allergies.

• Dimensions (mms): 508 x 334 x 220
• Weight: 10.3kg
• Moisture removal: 12L / day
• Type: compressor
• Noise level: 36dB
• Water tank capacity: 2.1L
• Recommended room size: 55m2
• Drainage: tank or continuous
• Filters: dust, anti-allergy and active carbon filter
• Extras: dedicated laundry function

Set-up

Once removed from the box, as the DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier is a condenser dryer, you need to leave it stand for a few hours to let the refrigerant settle. Once you're ready to switch it on, there's a few simple steps to get the filters in place.

Removing the back panel to find the slots where the filters sit is a simple procedure, and requires minimal effort to click the back panel in and out of position. Once removed, the slots for the filters to sit in are easily identifiable and you do not require any technical skills to insert them.

As soon as they are in place, it's a case of clicking the panel back on and then remembering to remove and wash them regularly to ensure they continue to absorb dust and harmful air particles.

Other than this, there is no other set-up needed unless you want to use the continuous drainage function. This is also an easy task and simply involves inserting the supplied drainage tube into the grey tube shown below the filter area. Once in place, ensure the other end of the tube is positioned into a sink or drain and the collected moisture will pour away.

Using the dehumidifer

As the purpose of testing the product was to see if it dried clothes effectively, using it was as simple as plugging it in and switching it on. As the first mode is the laundry one - denoted by the clothing symbol, I didn't even have to press another button. All that was left to do was wait for it to work.

Once the water tank is full, a red light illuminates and the appliance automatically switches off. The low decibel count means the dehumidifier is fairly quiet when running, so I'd recommend you don't rely on hearing it switch off to know when the tank is full. Even though I work from my bedroom so am in close proximity to the landing, I've failed to notice the drop in noise level - it's more of a background hum than a noise I'd consider intrusive.

Once the water is emptied and the tank is back in place, the dehumidifier will automatically start working again unless you have switched it off prior to removing the tank.

Manufacturer best use instructions for drying laundry

De'Longhi experts recommend the following:

"The most effective way to dry clothes is by having the dehumidifier operating in the same room ideally with closed doors and windows, this way moisture extraction is targeted to that specific environment and not the rest of the house. 

"As the moisture is being extracted from the air, there is no specific requirement to have the product right by the clothes, and certainly no requirement for any physical contact.

"Typically the smaller the room, the quicker and more efficient the clothes drying function will be, since the moisture extraction is targeted to that specific environment."

It's also recommended to:

• Leave a free space of at least 50 cm at the front of the dehumidifier, so as not to block the air outlet
• For efficient ventilation leave a space of about 5-10 cm at the back of the appliance

How I set up my drying zone

Although I followed the De'Longhi advice in terms of placing clothes on the airer allowing for adequate spacing and minimal contact or overlapping of clothing to maximise air circulation, I was not able to adhere to the guidelines of using it in a contained room with closed doors and windows.

My normal drying location is a small landing at the top of a small set of stairs, leading to three bedrooms. Even though I can close the bedroom doors, the stairs do not have a separate door - essentially making the space far bigger. 

When it comes to frequency of usage, there are three people in my household - myself and two boys aged 18 and 11. Between casual clothing, school uniform, sportswear, towels and bedding, my washing machine is usually in use 4-5 times a week . Other than towels that I tumble dry, most items are placed on the airer.

Bedding is also draped over the landing bannister to dry, so I continued this practise while testing the dehumidifier.

Does it work?

As stated in the opening verdict, the DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier is very effective at drying laundry. But just how efficient is it compared to my heated airer?

Heated airer experience

Although I never timed exactly how long clothes took to dry on my heated airer, I do know that on average, even if I put it on in the evening and left it on overnight, sometimes thick waistbands, or items such as hoodies were still not completely dry the next morning. 

It's not the most scientific of measurements, but how I tended to view its efficiency. Added to this was the fact that without the cover, it easily took twice as long to dry the items. 

Unless the items were lightweight or the room temperature itself was higher, I could never rely on washing being dry in a few hours. Emergency requests for something to be dry in time were usually dealt with by a blast in the tumble drier or a stint on a radiator. 

And, as I was usually replacing one load of dry washing with another wet load, there were times when I felt it was constantly switched on - especially in the winter.

Prior to using the dehumidifier, as I was conscious I was expecting it to operate effectively in a larger, more open space than recommended, I was assuming results would be much the same. And if I'm honest, I thought it would take even longer.

DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier experience

But it's always good to be proved wrong.

After a month of testing, I've never once had to leave it on overnight. Most items are iron-dry within a few hours - the only exception being the occasional hood, cuff or waistband of my son's thick hoodies. But even with a little repositioning on the airer they are soon dry enough to put into a cupboard.

Added to that, clothes feel softer, have never smelt damp - something which I experienced with the heated airer - and as the dehumidifier pushes out warm air in the laundry mode, the landing itself is also feeling warmer and fresher. 

Given that there are no windows, I'm also feeling less worried about the extra moisture the wet clothes are adding to the space as I know the dehumidifier will be dealing with it.

Even bedding which has been draped on the bannister and isn't directly next to the dehumidifier is drying in the same time frame. 

Have I put less on the airer then when it was heated? Potentially a few items less, but as time has gone on and it's worked so well, I've added more. It also has an auto switch-off function when the tank is full, so even if I forget to turn it off, it will stop operating. Something the heated airer didn't do as there was no timer on the one I have.

And with regards to emptying water, I've found myself doing this once a day at the most if I've managed to squeeze in two loads of laundry. Usually it seems to be around every other day. 

So whilst the water tank may be small if you are using it 24/7 to dry a room or deal with a damp problem, for laundry it hasn't been too arduous a task.

Costs to run

My heated airer is sold under the premise of costing 9p per hour to run, whereas the  DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier costs around 8p per hour. A negligible difference per hour, but one that will mount up over time with quicker laundry drying times.

I've not yet noticed a difference in my electricity bills and don't really expect to while it's still relatively cool in terms of ambient temperature. Once the warmer months arrive, and the daily temperature is consistently higher (unlike now where it only peaks when the central heating is on) I would hope my laundry dries even faster with the dehumidifier.

Final verdict

I wish the display showed more

Even though I wasn't using the DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier to assist with mould removal, I was a little disappointed to see it didn't have a display with a humidity reading. 

Knowing how much wet washing in a room increases the humidity would have been beneficial and also seemed slightly unusual given the larger 14L and 16L versions do have an LED display that shows this number. 

As I live in a listed building with single glazing, I have another dehumidifier in my son's bedroom to help deal with window condensation . This shows the humidity level and I would have been interested to see if they read the same results.

Without a reading, I feel it would also make it more difficult to use in a house with a moisture problem. When it comes to what is normal humidity in a house, the aim is to reach somewhere around the 40-50% mark. The DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier has three options denoted on the front by one to three water droplets which equate to 40, 50 and 60% humidity.

Common sense would suggest that if you're unsure, aim for the middle setting. It will auto switch-off once it's reached the required level, so if you find this isn't sufficient, you can easily change it. Or, consider where you've placed the dehumidifier. Kitchens and bathrooms will naturally have higher moisture levels.

It's also quite heavy to carry, but if you're using it to dry laundry the chances are it will stay in one location so I don't feel this is too much of a negative. Likewise the fact the water tank is relatively small compared to the extraction rate could be off-putting if you have to walk a distance each time to empty it.

But I would thoroughly recommend buying one

If there's a fan club for using a dehumidifier to dry laundry then sign me up as despite my initial reservations, I'm a fully-fledged convert. The DeLonghi DEX212F 12L Tasciugo AriaDry Dehumidifier is cheaper than the cost of running a tumble dryer and for an appliance, even visually errs on the side of stylish. 

I love the speed at which my laundry now dries and the fact it's softer and easier to iron. It's also relatively small and not something I'd be trying to hide in a cupboard when guests visited. I think my 'heated airer' has well and truly been demoted to the position of 'airer' for the forseable future.

I'm also looking forward to testing its ability to remove the condensation from the windows in my bedroom in the winter.....if I ever give it a rest from drying clothes. 

To find out more about other dehumidifiers we've tried and tested, read our best dehumidifier buying guide.

The EcoAir DD2 simple desiccant dehumidifier is designed for spaces where the temperature might be lower than typical room temperature. For instance in a colder house, or in a garage or conservatory where damp could potentially thrive.

Even the best dehumidifiers that work on a compressor system are unlikely to be as effective in these spaces, while desiccant dehumidifiers are specifically designed to be able to tackle the cold without a change to its efficiency. Desiccant dehumidifiers also gently expel hot air to warm the space, while compressor dehumidifiers do not.

Here we review the EcoAir DD2 simple desiccant dehumidifier, which is available to buy on Amazon, to find out how it performed to stop mould, condensation and damp.

Is the EcoAir DD2 Simple desiccant dehumidifier easy to setup and use?

When the dehumidifier first arrived, unboxing it was simple. You could easily lift it out using the two handholes on either side towards the back of the unit. It was very lightweight at 6.7kg, making removing it from the box straight-forward.

My initial impression of the EcoAir DD2 simple desiccant dehumidifier was that it is a very slick-looking unit. It is a sensible height at just over half a metre along with being fairly slimline with a depth of only 25.3cm. This made it easy to tuck away when not in use. The unit also came with a one-metre long plastic hose for continuous drainage, a bonus I was looking forward to trying out. 

Next was connecting the machine to a power outlet and figuring out how it worked. Initially the three digital options on the top of the unit took some thinking about but the instruction manual made everything very easy to understand. The left button toggled between its economy and turbo modes, the centre button set the desired humidity level, and the third powered up the unit. 

If I was being picky, it might have been nice to see the exact humidity level displayed in numbers on the unit (the geek in me likes watching to see the humidity drop) but this really was a minor point. It's worth noting too that on the humidity dial more droplets indicates more water extraction rather than higher humidity.

But all in all, I quickly had the EcoAir DD2 simple desiccant dehumidifier powered up and working without much effort. It was easy to move around too.

How did I test the EcoAir DD2?

A desiccant dehumidifier works differently to a compressor dehumidifier in terms of how a dehumidifier works and for this reason we tailored the testing process to settings where these types of dehumidifier are best suited. In my home, these included:

1) In my cold kitchen/diner area: Circa 12°C/14°C with a damp wall and single-glazed and draughty sash windows.

2) In my unheated garage: This is currently storing my second-hand utility room units that currently have mould growing on them.

3) In a large (and old) white van that I have on my driveway that is storing other bits of wood and offcuts that may or may not come in handy for future building projects. The van suffers from condensation on the internal roof due to poor airflow and cold metal walls.

Did the EcoAir DD2 work well inside?

I was impressive at how well the desiccant dehumidifier handled all three places where I tested it but inside was perhaps the biggest test, given that compressor dehumidifiers are usually the go-to option for internal domestic spaces.

But it turns out that when your room temperature is regularly below 15°C, a desiccant dehumidifier can be a better option. The guys over at Meaco suggest: "As a guide, don’t use a 10 or 12 litre compressor machine below 15°C and only use the larger 20 and 25 litre machines down to 10°C."

This is because compressor dehumidifiers can become less effective when operating below 15°C as they work by passing air over a cold coil to condense the water and collect it. When temperatures drop, the cold coil is no longer cold enough compared to the surrounding air to condense the water.

A desiccant dehumidifier meanwhile doesn't have the same problem as it works instead by drawing in air over a filter containing a material called "zeolite". Desiccant dehumidifiers also warm the air too, which is an added bonus in notoriously cold spaces. You can read more on this in our piece: desiccant vs compressor dehumidifier.

Inside my cold kitchen/diner

My kitchen/diner area is a great example of a room inside a house that is actually a little on the cold side for a compressor dehumidifier. The room's temperature is around 12°C to 14°C in winter (sometimes lower if I don't put the heating on), making it the perfect testing ground for the EcoAir DD2 simple desiccant dehumidifier.

Plugging the EcoAir DD2 desiccant dehumidifier in for the first time inside, the handbook warns users not to worry about any peculiar smells wafting from the unit. I didn't notice this until getting right up close to the air outlet and can only describe it as a subtle plasticky waft. This is the air passing over the Zeolite and apparently is not at all hazardous. I can't say it bothered me but it was of note and is the case for all desiccant dehumidifiers not just this model. This smell disappeared within a few hours of use. I also enjoyed walking past the dehumidifier as it gently expelled hot air into the otherwise cold room.

The EcoAir DD2 simple desiccant dehumidifier is able to operate between temperatures of 1°C up to 40°C, an impressive temperature range, so why wouldn't you ideally use this in rooms above 15°C? Essentially, you can but it comes down to running cost and when the room temperature is suitable for a compressor dehumidifier, these can be cheaper to run at warmer room temperatures.

Was it effective in colder temperatures?

In terms of testing the EcoAir DD2 in external domestic spaces, I was impressed by its dehumidifying ability despite temperatures dropping close to freezing point.

Inside the cold garage

While I didn't risk testing to the dehumidifier's exact low temperature threshold of 1°C (there's no automatic switch-off if temperature go below it), I tested the dehumidifier when temperatures were due to dip to a minimum of 4°C overnight and found the unit impressively effective. 

Humidity levels in the garage started at around 70%RH, according to the dehumidifier's humidity gauge, and ended up at around 60%RH after running it for 24 hours.

My garage has no insulation in the walls or roof and a large gap under the old-fashioned 80s metal garage door. Therefore it was good to see that despite this there was still a substantial drop in the humidity level. I was able to wipe the mould off my utility room units and be confident it wouldn't return with the humidity level closer to the 40-60%RH range for a normal humidity level in a house.

I also have an open drain in my garage, courtesy of the old owner of the house,  which came in super handy for using the continuous water drainage functionality of the machine. I found this function particularly useful as it meant I could leave the dehumidifier to do its thing without constantly checking if the 3 litre water tank needed emptying. 

The dehumidifier's automatic shutoff when it reached the desired humidity setting (and automatic restart) also added to this feeling of being able to leave the machine to get on with the job.

Inside the cold van with condensation

Inside the van, the dehumidifier was even more effective, I suspect because it was more of a sealed environment with less airflow. The key challenge here was whether or not the desiccant dehumidifier managed to eliminate the "sweating" and get rid of the condensation from the inside of the roof.

Within 24 hours I can report that it definitely passed the test, with a starting humidity of around 70%RH down to around 55-60%RH and not a drop of condensation in sight. I wasn't able to attach the continuous hose as I couldn't find a suitable gap, but the 3 litre tank was enough to last the night, ready for emptying in the morning (there's a handle on the tank too for easy emptying). It is also worth pointing out that the dehumidifier was easy to move around due to being lightweight and not too cumbersome in its shape.

What was note-worthy is that rigging up a dehumidifier inside a van is potentially a challenge. I was only able to do this as I have outside plug sockets on my driveway and a van that has been internally wired with sockets as well as having an external waterproof ABB connector for power. Similar might be true for those that want to use the EcoAir DD2 in a caravan or other vehicle with power points inside.

How often did the dehumidifier need emptying?

With the continuous drainage pipe attached, the EcoAir DD2 simple dehumidifier never needs emptying, which is an incredibly useful feature as long as you have a  drain for the water from the pipe to flow in to. The pipe, which comes with the unit unlike some other brands of dehumidifier, is one-metre long which was sufficient to reach the drain in my garage. However, it might be worth having an extension lead on stand-by if your power hookup isn't close to a drain.

It is worth noting that the continuous drainage pipe is gravity-fed and won't work with a sink unless you can lift the dehumidifier up to sink level. It does however revert back to tank drainage if you encounter this problem.

Fitting the continuous drainage tube was straight-forward but a little fiddly. The hole for it at the back of the unit was easy to access by popping out the plastic with a screwdriver, but pushing the plastic hose into the outlet took some reshaping of the hose so it was perfectly round and lining up. 

And, in case you were wondering, if you don't want to use the continuous drainage functionality, the machine easily switches back to using the tank if you remove the hose. It doesn't matter if you popped out the plastic bit or not.

How much does the EcoAir DD2 cost to run?

Typically, desiccant dehumidifiers are more expensive to run than compressor dehumidifiers due to being higher wattage. However, the EcoAir DD2 simple desiccant dehumidifier was built with energy saving in mind with a very low 260 wattage on its lowest setting, up to 570 watts on its highest setting.

At the lowest wattage, this means the EcoAir costs 7.1p per kWh to run with current energy prices of 27.3p.

The calculation is: 0.260kWh x 27.35p = 7.1p per hour. I ran the dehumidifier for an average 8 hours per day, meaning I spent roughly 56.8p per day or £1.70 for when I ran it for an entire 24 hours. This of course doesn't take into account when the dehumidifier automatically shuts down after reaching the desired humidity level.

To put this into perspective, the popular Meaco low energy dehumidifier - a compressor dehumidifier – is 219 watts to run (6p per hour) on its lowest setting – so the EcoAir was actually very comparable, despite being a desiccant dehumidifier. 

Does it have a laundry mode?

I was pleased to find that the EcoAir DD2 simple has a very powerful laundry mode, which is essentially a super-high setting (or rather a super low humidity setting) to extract extra moisture from the air.

This was easily selected by using the dial's maximum moisture extraction setting.

Is the EcoAir DD2 noisy?

I was impressed with how quiet this particular dehumidifier was. At only 37-46 decibels it beats many of the best dehumidifiers on the market at the moment, which was beneficial so I could keep it running in the background during online meetings for work.

Are there any additional features?

Yes, there are a couple of additional features with this dehumidifier that were useful. The EcoAir DD2 comes with an anti-tilt feature for safety, which is handy when moving it about into places like garages where you might be moving other items around and knock the machine unintentionally.

The EcoAir DD2 also has an antibacterial filter that was easy to clean when looking to do your regular dehumidifier maintenance (important to do this with all dehumidifiers).

Do I recommend the EcoAir DD2?

If you are looking for a desiccant dehumidifier to eliminate damp, mould or condensation (or all three) in colder spaces I would definitely recommend spending the money and buying the EcoAir DD2 Simple dehumidifier. 

It can  run at both energy efficient levels as well as having more powerful settings to tackle intensive humidity levels where needed. While it has only a small 3-litre tank this was ample for a 24-period with the extra option of continuous drainage to be able to leave the dehumidifier for longer periods when set-up in a space like a van, garage or caravan that you might not want to check regularly.

The unit is also lightweight and easily manoeuvrable, which I found very useful when testing the product in different areas. I can imagine this would come in useful to remove the likelihood of needing to buy more than one unit for different places in the home.

All-in-all the EcoAir DD2 was an easy to use, good all-round machine. A bit more pricey, perhaps, but worth it.

About this review

Homebuilding & Renovating is not given any compensation by EcoAir for our reviews, but may be allowed to keep the product for long-term testing meaning we can test it over a greater length of time, and update this review if required.

The Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Driver is a power tool that can tackle a host of tough DIY jobs. But, you probably already own a decent cordless drill so why do you need an impact driver as well?

On the surface impact drivers bear a striking resemblance to the best cordless drills, but a few subtle differences set them apart from your everyday drill. The body is typically slightly smaller, but the most noticeable change is the chuck. It’s smaller, being 6.35mm in size meaning it can only accommodate one size bit. But, don't panic, it can take on screwdriver bits, drill bits and with the help of an adaptor, different size sockets. 

Under the surface the similarities continue, impact drivers will have brushed or  brushless motors, but where they differ is in the amount of torque they produce. More torque means more power through the bit, meaning it can tackle DIY jobs that need more power and save the motor on your drill.

So how did the Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Drive fare? Find out what I thought after putting it through a host of essential everyday DIY tasks.   

Unboxing the Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Driver

 It doesn't matter how many times I unbox a power tool, I still get excited about what lies inside the packaging. And on a less exciting note, I always want to know if the packaging can be recycled. It's rare that it isn't and the Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Driver didn’t disappoint.

Resplendent in lime green you know you are getting a Ryobi product before you even open the box. There’s plenty of pointers on the packaging to what you are getting, what features the impact driver has and some neat simple infographics to tell you what the Ryobi can do.  

It wasn’t easy to open the box, which is a good sign, but I like to keep mine like new so I took my time. Inside the packaging is simple and kept to a minimum, just enough to hold the impact driver, the drill bits and instruction manual.

As a cordless model you need a battery. Being part of the Ryobi ONE+ range means you can choose from a selection of compatible batteries with different power ratings. For this review I was furnished with the recommended 18V ONE+ 2.0AH Lithium+ Compact Battery and a Ryobi 2.0A Battery Charger to power up the battery. 

These are essential extras to power the impact driver, but if like me you already have a charger and battery you can use these instead. But for this test I stuck with the battery and charger sent.

The 2.0AH battery is one of the least powerful in the Ryobi range, so it will need charging more often than a 4.0AH or 5.0AH battery, but there’s more of this later in the review.

How well built is the Ryobi?

The Ryobi is solid and sturdy and feels well built in the hand. It's well balanced and you get the impression that it's going to be with you a long time. But it's no heavyweight, weighing just 1.6kg with the battery, so you won't be struggling to use it for long periods. 

A two-part rubberised grip sits neatly around the handle, making sure that you have full control over the driver even when at full tilt. Powering the Ryobi is a 3200 rpm motor that provides more than enough power for any DIY tasks and compares favourably with professional impact drivers that commonly have 3600 rpm motors. So its more than adequate for occasional or even regular DIYers.

What features does the Ryobi Cordless Impact Driver have?

Impact drivers may look like a drill, but they have more torque than a standard drill, a lot more in some cases. The Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Driver comes with around 240 Nm, which is around four times more than you get on your average cordless drill. So it can tackle tougher DIY jobs such as screwing in long screws with ease. A two way (forward and reverse) rotation selector means it can unscrew just as well. 

It also has a maximum impact rate of 3800 rpm, which helps push screws into a surface. This is a little less than a more powerful impact driver, but again its ideal for DIY tasks.

A variable speed trigger helps keep control of the power going through the driver, and is easy to control. It can gently introduce the power or go all out straight from the off.  

A keyless standard sized 6.35mm (or quarter of an inch) chuck makes it easy to quickly change bits. It slips easily back into place to securely hold the bit. The Ryobi comes with two impact bits, and a 9.5mm socket adaptor (this works for small sockets, ideal for screwing in bolts). 

We used the Philips bits for all our test tasks and by the end it was out of action. Personally, we would have liked to have seen at least three Phillips bits, for this very reason. Finally there is an LED light to light up the working area. It's powerful enough to do this but leaves an annoying shadow.    

What’s the Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Driver battery life?

The RYOBI is a bare tool so will need a battery to work. This is worth noting as you will need to pay extra for a battery and a charger if you’re a first time purchaser of a Ryobi tool. But on the plus side it's part of the ONE+ range, so if you already own a Ryobi cordless tool you will already have a charger and battery, which helps keep purchase costs down. 

You may want to splash out on another battery so you don’t have to swap, or you might want to invest in a more powerful battery so you get more usage without recharging. An extra battery is always useful.

For this review I used a 18V ONE+ 2.0AH Lithium+ Compact Battery which according to the Ryobi website, it can drive in 180 decking screws on a single charge. A 4.0AH battery – which it is currently giving away with the Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Driver bare tool – can deal with more than double the amount of screws, claiming 450. But this will depend on what type of screws and what type of job it's being used for.

To be honest we lost count of how many screws we used, but I went back and did a quick count up and it was just over 200 and the battery still had one bar left on the battery indicator. So I went back and added another 20-25 screws before the battery lost all juice.

But, how does this convert to time? This depends on how quick you are? We were averaging around 4-5 screws a minute across several different jobs (more on this below) over a few days. We timed each job (generally working 10-20 minutes each time) and adding together we got around 40-45 minutes use out of a single charge. But, if you're only doing one screw a minute it's going to last a lot longer.

So how long does it take to recharge the battery? I was using the 18V ONE+ 2.0A Battery Charger, which states that it takes 60 minutes to fully recharge the battery. In our test it took a little less than this, but not by any great margin. 

How well did the Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Driver work?

Alongside style you want substance and the Ryobi delivered. To test the Ryobi ONE+ Cordless Impact Driver we ran through a few everyday DIY tasks that an impact driver is commonly used for. First up we used 120mm screws to secure fence panels to wooden posts in our garden. I originally put up the fence panels using an everyday Black and Decker cordless drill. A lot of the screws didn't make it all the way as the drill didn’t have the torque.

But this was no problem for the impact driver. It easily dealt with any of the problems screws. But you need to be careful – and make use of the variable speed trigger – as the Ryobi is powerful enough to keep going and start splitting the wood. The same applies for the new screws that I put into my decking.

The final test was to drill into exterior masonry. We needed to purchase the bits separately as they didn’t come with the driver. This time I was using 100mm screws and had no problem drilling holes and fitting the screws. Inside, where I had struggled with my cordless drill putting up a shelf on the wall, the Ryobi did the job. And, at no point did I get the smell of burning motor, though it did get warm after quite intense use, but this wasn’t unexpected.  

A few things that could be improved are the light and supplied drill bits. The light sits on the top of the battery holder pointing up and is efficient rather than outstanding. Personally, I prefer lights that sit around the chuck and light up the area in front. The screwdriver bits didn't last past this test, with the Philips being rendered useless, so had to purchase new bits. I know this can happen on DIY jobs, but would have liked them to have lasted longer.

If you’re looking for a versatile power tool that can be used for a variety of DIY tasks, the Ryobi R18MT may be the product for you. 

This oscillating multitool is part of the user-friendly Ryobi 18V ONE+ system and it touts itself as a small but mighty product. Combining robust construction with a short-bodied design, the Ryobi R18MT helps you to observe and control the work you’re doing and promises exceptional plunge cutting and grinding capabilities.

I wanted to know how the Ryobi R18MT would perform when it was put to the test. So I put the multitool through its paces with a variety of everyday DIY tasks designed to see if it's worth your purchase.

Product Overview

As you’d expect of a multitool, the Ryobi R18MT has several uses. These include: 

• Sanding and finishing materials such as metal, wood and plastic, using the bundled-in sanding pad with a compatible sanding sheet.
• Scraping and plunge-cutting into materials such as metal (non-ferrous), wood, plastic and plaster, using a compatible cutting blade attachment.
• Cutting holes in walls for switches or power sockets, using a compatible cutting blade attachment.
• Removing detritus such as old grout and adhesive.
• Grinding surfaces 

What's Included?

The Ryobi R18MT Multitool comes with the following accessories and attachments: 

• Sanding pad
• 6 x abrasive sheets (various grades) 
• Plunge cutting attachment
• Segmented cutting attachment
• Adaptor 
• Instruction booklet  

It's worth noting that it does not include a carry bag, which would have been a useful addition. 

How does the Ryobi R18MT Multitool perform DIY tasks?

I tested the Ryobi R18MT with a series of common DIY tasks, including plunge cutting, sanding and grinding:

1. Plunge cutting

In my hands-on testing, the R18MT was at its most impressive when used for plunge cutting (which means cutting straight into the surface of a workpiece). 

With the tool’s plunge cutter attachment in place, I was able to neatly cut into the surface of wood, either straight or at an angle. The attachment cut quickly, especially when I had the oscillation speed set to maximum. Using the R18MT, it was possible to cut neat wedges out of my test materials. 

Top tip: you can use the adjustable head of the R18MT to help you cut into a material at the desired angle, by holding the tool horizontal while the blade cuts. 

2. Cutting with the flush cutter

The R18MT seems to be a little less powerful when used with its segmented cutting blade. Despite the intended metal-cutting capabilities of the segmented cutter attachment, the tool struggles to cut into hard materials such as metal. 

On a positive note, the R18MT was able to cut wood, slowly and accurately, using the segmented cutter attachment. I’d recommend using this feature only for wood, plaster, and relatively soft metals. To cut harder materials, consider using an appropriate angle grinder or tile cutter instead.

3. Sanding 

While sanding isn’t the R18MT’s strongest suit, there’s a good chance you’ll be able to use this tool for certain sanding tasks. 

With the sanding pad and a compatible abrasive sheet fitted to the multitool, I sanded a variety of hardwood and softwood workpieces. The R18MT struggled to sand oak – but there’s no shame in that, as some of the best orbital sanders aren’t great at sanding that famously solid material, either. 

The R18MT fared much better when it came to sanding softwoods, or removing paint from the surface of a workpiece. The finish was pretty smooth, and the gently pointed footprint of the sanding pad proved useful for sanding highly specific areas. 

4. Grinding

Another handy string to a multi-tool’s bow is grinding – whether you’re grinding a stone floor using a diamond-tipped segmented blade attachment, or removing detritus such as dried-on adhesive from a surface. Taking the less dusty of these particular options, I used the R18MT to remove some stubborn old adhesive that had once held some coving to a wall. The tool ground away the unwanted material quickly and accurately.  

Is the Ryobi R18MT Multitool easy to use?

Oscillating multitools are often fiddly, noisy and generally quite tricky to use, when compared to certain other DIY tools like cordless drills. So, I was delighted to discover that the Ryobi R18MT is supremely user-friendly. 

This multitool has some excellent, useful features that you won’t always get with this type of tool. For instance, there’s a head adjustment mechanism, so you can set the head to one of five angles: 0, 22½, 45, 67½ or 90 degrees. I can see this feature coming in handy for tasks such as cutting out wedge-shaped pieces from wood. There’s also a lock-on button, so you can keep the R18MT running without having to hold down the trigger. And a speed control dial allows to to set the speed of oscillation, before or during use. 

Not only is the ergonomically moulded handle of the R18MT comfy to hold; there’s also a groove on the underside of the tool which will accommodate your forefinger while you use the tool two-handed. The R18MT proved a very good fit for my hands, which are medium-sized. Users with large hands might have a slightly harder time fitting both hands around the body of the tool.  

Often, one of the most difficult aspects of using a multitool is changing the cutting/grinding/sanding attachments. Thankfully, this isn’t the case with the R18MT, which holds its attachments using a blade clamp secured by a blade lock/release lever. The lever is quite stiff, so don’t be afraid to push it up forcefully. When the lever is up, you can attach or remove an attachment, then clamp the blade lock/release down again, ready for use. I was impressed (and relieved) to note that the mechanism held attachments perfectly securely, whenever I used the R18MT.

Is the Ryobi R18MT Multitool the right option for you?

The great thing about an oscillating multitool like the R18MT is that it can give you lots of added DIY capabilities in a single product (plus attachments). The not-so-great thing is that the tool is unlikely to perform its various actions as well as a single-purpose alternative would. 

With this in mind, the R18MT is an excellent choice for buyers who currently lack tools to perform multiple important DIY tasks, especially plunge cutting and grinding, both of which it does brilliantly. But for buyers who are looking mainly for just one function, it might be better to get a high-performing sander like the Makita BO5041, for example. 

Some users, including tradespeople and DIYers who have very tough work ahead, will probably benefit from purchasing a more powerful multitool than the R18MT. Some trade-standard options, such as the Milwaukee M18BMT-0, will do a better job of cutting and grinding the hardest materials than Ryobi’s tool is able to do. 

Should you buy the Ryobi R18MT Multitool?

I’d happily recommend the Ryobi R18MT to most DIY users – particularly those who are mainly interested in plunge cutting and grinding functionality. The Ryobi R18MT is currently available to buy on Amazon for only £99.95, making it a fairly affordable option for everyday household tasks. 

It’s a particularly good choice of ‘multi’ for first-time users, with an accessible attachment-change mechanism and an intuitive design that’s easy on the hands. The adjustable head is another appealing feature, and one which you won’t find in many other multitools. 

Another positive factor is the cordless operability of the Ryobi R18MT, which makes the tool easy to use all around the house. If you already own a compatible Ryobi 18V lithium-ion battery and charger, the R18MT becomes very good value for money. 

Before you go ahead and buy this oscillating multitool, it’s worth taking a minute to consider whether you’re happy to use this type of tool at home. Some of the jobs you’re likely to do with it will generate dust, sparks or other airborne debris, so you should always wear a dust mask and eye protection while using the tool. Oscillating multi-tools like this one are among the noisiest of power tools, so you might want to wear ear plugs too. Also, bear in mind that the R18MT is not intended for use on wet materials, or in wet conditions. 

With all that said, if what you want is a cordless oscillating multitool, the Ryobi R18MT is an effective and highly accessible option.

Oscillating multi-tools are not to be confused with rotary multi-tools, which have a different action (although they do have some uses in common).

The Makita BO5041 Random Orbit Sander is a mains-powered orbital sander, suitable for craftspeople and tradespeople alike. As an avid DIYer, sanding is a common task in my home renovation projects – so I was eager to test this model from the famous Japanese toolmaker. 

The BO5041 claims to be more powerful and faster than many of its competitors, and promises to provide a smoother finish. All of this sounds good on paper – but did this random orbit sander have the grit to make the grade? 

Read on to find out how well the Makita BO5041 performed in my hand-on testing, which included tasks such as removing paint from a wooden window sill, and sanding various sample materials.

What is The Makita BO5041 Random Orbit Sander?

The Makita BO5041 Random Orbit Sander is an electric hand sander capable of sanding a comprehensive range of household surfaces and craft materials, such as sanding wood, metals and plastics, and non-toxic painted surfaces. 

You can use the BO5041 for tasks like finishing surfaces, removing paint from woodwork, sanding wooden floors and taking down the size of workpieces. 

Random orbit sanders like this one are at their best when used to sand a large, flat surface. The randomised action of the sander means the tool will usually leave fewer streaks, swirls or machine marks than you’d sometimes get with a different types of sander.

Specifications

• Model: BO5041
• Our rating: 5/5
• Sheet size: 125 mm (standard) 
• Orbits per minute: 4,000 - 12,000
• Dimensions (L x W x H): 218 mm x 123 mm x 153 mm
• Net weight: 1.4 kg 
• Power source: mains-powered (corded)
• Features: variable speed dial, detachable front grip, dust collection bag, lock-on switch
• Input power: 300 watts
• Warranty: 1 year (extends to 3 years if registered)

What's included?

• Detachable front grip 
• 1 x sanding sheet
• Dust collection bag
• Instruction booklet 

Does the Makita BO5041 effectively?

The Makita BO5041, which can be purchased on Amazon, proved highly impressive during my hands-on testing, delivering a winning combination of power, control and user-friendliness. 

Sanding window sills

First, I used the BO5041 to sand a painted window sill. I needed to remove a layer of paint and left-over adhesive from a window ledge, to prepare the ledge for filling and repainting. The sander removed the unwanted materials with minimal effort, and worked very quickly compared to other orbital sanders I’ve used for similar jobs.

The maximum power setting is particularly impressive, providing rapid sanding without causing excessive vibration or making the tool difficult to control. If you’ve got a lot of sanding to do, the BO5041’s high-powered sanding will save you a lot of time and effort. However, I’d recommend switching to a lower speed when fine control is required – for instance, when your aim is to sand away just a little material. 

Sanding wood

To really put the BO5041 through its paces, I also tested it on various other workpieces, including a block of oak – one of the most difficult-to-sand hardwoods commonly used in a DIY context. Whatever material we used it on, Makita’s sander removed material and applied a smooth finish quickly and easily. Furthermore, in all of my test activities with the BO5041, the surfaces sanded came out very smooth and free from machine marks. 

Dust extraction

A detachable dust bag (included) can be fitted to the dust extraction port of the BO5041 to collect some of the dust from sanding. Detaching, emptying and attaching the bag proved simple during my testing – and the amount of dust that emptied out into my dustbin offered proof that the attachment had captured a good share of dust. With that said, if you’ve done much sanding in your time, you’ll be aware that this type of attachment can only do so much to reduce the volume of dust released into the room. 

Noise levels

Like many of the best orbital sanders, the BO5041 operates noisily, with a sound power rating of 92 dB. This comes with the territory. 

Is the Makita BO5041 easy to use?

The Makita BO5041 has some outstanding features that set it apart from the average DIY sanding tool:

The lock button: As well as a switch trigger to activate sanding, there’s also a lock button that can be pressed to make the sander operate continuously, allowing you to take your finger off the trigger. This will make a difference, during long-duration jobs. I found it perfectly easy to use the lock button during sanding. It can be released by pressing the trigger, when you want to stop the sander. 

Detachable front grip: Unlike some of the other random orbit sanders I’ve used, the BO5041 comes with a detachable front grip accessory bundled in, allowing you to comfortably hold the tool two-handed during sanding. The need for this feature tells you something about the power of this sander, which greatly exceeds that of most cordless models. If we were being hyper-critical, we’d say this detachable grip is a little too stubby. Nonetheless, it’s a useful option. 

Variable speed: The BO5041 works at variable speed, so you can choose slower or faster settings to suit the task at hand. We were really impressed with the user-friendly dial provided for this purpose, which is inset into the top of the tool, exactly where your thumb will rest. It’s recommended to use the fastest speed settings (between 4 and 5 on the dial) for regular sanding, while slower settings should be used for finishing (2 to 4) and polishing (1). 

As far as ease-of-use is concerned, my only minor criticism of the BO5041 is that the dust bag sometimes gets slightly in the way when the sander is used on a flat surface. But all things considered, using the BO5041 is a breeze. With the right speed setting selected and the lock-on button pressed in, all that’s left for you to do is hold the sander wherever you want it to sand.

Is the Makita BO5041 right for you?

If you’re happy to pay for a fairly expensive random orbit sander, then you won’t find many reasons not to choose the BO5041. It’s more powerful and easier to control than most other tools of its type that are sold at a similar price. 

The BO5041 might not be for you, however, if you overwhelmingly prefer cordless power tools. Without a doubt, there are a few downsides that come with the BO5041’s main-powered design, and it’s worth weighing these up before you buy. For instance, if you need to sand in high-up places – such as the upper sections of a wood-panelled wall, then the BO5041’s relatively short power cable might limit your mobility and reach. Similarly, users who do a lot of sanding outdoors will probably need to use the tool with an extension lead. With a cordless random orbit sander such as the Ryobi R18ROS-0, you wouldn’t run into the same problems.

On the other hand, the corded design of the Makita BO5041 arguably brings more positives than negatives. Because the tool runs off mains power, you can simply plug it into the wall and use it for as long as you like. This is in stark contrast to most cordless random orbit sanders, which tend to drain their batteries quickly due to their high energy requirements. During most other use cases, the power cable is no impediment to the easy use of the BO5041.

Should you buy the Makita BO5041?

I was blown away by this sander’s power, efficiency and ease-of-use. If you’re sure that what you need is a random orbit sander, and you’re willing to spend a little over £100, then the Makita BO5041 will almost certainly be a great choice for you. 

Do bear in mind that random orbit sanders like this one are intended mainly for sanding large, flat surfaces – such as sanding painted walls - rather than fine details. Readers who have a lot of intricate features to sand might want to purchase an additional detail sander such as the Bosch PSM 18 Li. 

The BO5041 should also be used with standard-size, 125 mm sandpaper discs (like these ones), with holes that match the holes on the tool’s sanding pad.

Remember to wear a good dust mask during sanding, and remove items such as textiles and electronics from the room before you start. Different DIY projects will call for different sandpaper grades and in some cases sanding wood by hand may be the best course of action. 

The Meaco 20L Low Energy Dehumidifier/Air Purifier is designed to help control humidity levels in a house, reducing or even eliminating window condensation and, subsequently, minimising the risk of damp.

It also offers further benefits. It can help to dry laundry quicker and, thanks to its HEPA filter, can also purify the air — ideal for those with allergies, but also a great way to create a fresher-feeling indoor air environment in general. 

This dehumidifier is perfect for those living in medium to large homes —  spaces up to 64m² are well served by this particular model. It can also be used in unheated basements or cellars. 

So, just how well does it live up to its claims, is it easy to use and is it worth the initial outlay and running costs further down the line? 

Does the Meaco 20L Low Energy Dehumidifier/Air Purifier work well?

Having tested the 20L Low Energy Dehumidifier, available to buy on Appliances Direct, over the course of four weeks at the time of writing this review, we can confirm that it has performed brilliantly, both at reducing condensation and also in reducing the drying time of damp laundry. 

It was easy to set up and proved excellent at pretty much eliminating the condensation on the windows of the first floor bedrooms in the house we tested it in. 

While it is a sizeable piece of kit, being set on castors made it easy to move around and the water tray couldn't have been simpler to remove and empty. While we were mainly focussed on the effect that this dehumidifier would have on the condensation problem the house was suffering from, we were also impressed with the way in which it sped up the time it took to dry wet washing. 

While not the cheapest product on the market, this is one high-quality and well-made piece of equipment with a host of useful extra features — plus its low running costs make it far cheaper to use than many of the alternatives out there. 

Is the 20L Low Energy Dehumidifier easy to set up?

While this dehumidifier is pretty large, it isn't too heavy and comes in a box with carry handles. Once it is out of the box, it is easy to move around thanks to the castors underneath. 

Set up couldn't be simpler. The instruction manual is clear and the controls are simple and, in all honesty, pretty self-explanatory. 

Once plugged in, the machine can be switched on, activating the digital display. The target humidity level can then be set — another very simple task. So, what is normal humidity in a house? 

“The average humidity inside UK homes should be around the 50-55%rh range and be slightly lower in winter months,” says Chris Michael, MD of Meaco. “Maintaining a humidity target of 40% in the winter will keep condensation from forming on your windows.”

With that in mind, by using the up and down arrows, we set the target at 55. We also selected the 'CO' mode. On this mode, the dehumidifier runs continuously. You could also choose to select 'AP' mode, although this just purifies the air as opposed to collecting any water. 

We were testing this dehumidifier in an old house that was prone to condensation and when the machine first started running, the relatively humidity showed as being 80%.

How does the Meaco 20L Low Energy Dehumidifier work?

How do dehumidifiers work? At a very basic level, they remove excess moisture from the air — something that helps reduce condensation and, in turn, damp. They can also help to dry wet laundry faster.

"A dehumidifier removes moisture from the air — excess moisture that you do not want to condense and hang around your home," says Chris Michael. "It helps to ease damp problems, gives you healthier air to breath and can even make your energy use more efficient.

"There are two main types of dehumidifier — the desiccant dehumidifier and the compressor dehumidifier," explains Chris. The Meaco Low Energy Dehumidifier we are testing is a compressor model.

Compressor dehumidifiers are best for anyone aiming to prevent damp and help clothes dry quicker. They are ideal for use in areas with temperatures above 15˚C and they are cheaper to run than desiccant.

"They have two sets of coils, the first cools to create the condensation, which is collected into the water tank, the second warms the dry air back to just above room temperature," says Chris. "This helps to create the dry air needed to combat condensation, mould and damp problems."

How did we test the dehumidifier?

As mentioned previously, testing of this dehumidifier was carried out in a house that was suffering from window condensation and, as a result, signs of damp. The dehumidifier was initially placed in the room that the problem was worst — the master bedroom.   

The fan was set at high speed with a the target humidity of 55%rh and was left to run for around six hours, before being switched off overnight. 

Meaco suggest placing the dehumidifier was placed in a central position such as the landing or hallway, so the following day the machine was moved to the landing of the house where it was left to run for six hours once again. 

Did the dehumidifier solve the condensation?

Results time. Did the dehumidifier clear up the condensation problem? In a word — yes. When placed in both the bedroom and the landing and have been running for between 6-8 hours during the day, there was no window condensation the following mornings. 

Despite being on the landing for some of the testing and all bedroom doors being shut overnight, it still worked to reduce the moisture in the air to such a degree that the bedroom windows remained condensation free and were clear in the morning. 

The next day we kept the dehumidifier off all day. The result of this? The condensation was back the following morning .

How much does the Meaco 20L Low Energy Dehumidifier cost to run?

One of the main concerns of many people is dehumidifier running costs. 

When calculating dehumidifier running costs, you need to take the model's power rating and find out how much you pay for electricity per kWh. The new Energy Price Cap rates from 1 October to 31 December 2023 stand at 27.35p per kWh.

Dehumidifiers are rated in Watts (W) — this is the amount of power they use. 

Our model has a power consumption of 219 watts at 20°C and 60% relative humidity.

To establish how much it would cost to run, we used the following calculation:

0.219kWh x 27.35p = 6p per hour. We have been running the dehumidifier for between 8-10 hours per day, meaning we are spending roughly 48-60p per day. 

Does the dehumidifier dry clothes faster?

To test this we placed the dehumidifier in a room with a clothes horse-full of damp washing — around a metre or so away. Meaco suggest that to dry laundry quickly, the dehumidifier should be placed in as small a room as possible with the doors and windows closed.

We selected the louvre swing button mode to set the louvre in motion, distributing the air around. Meaco recommend using the louvre to direct the airflow towards laundry. The air coming out in this mode is a little warm.

With the dehumidifier running, the washing took roughly five hours to dry — a good four to five hours less than without. 

How often did the water need emptying?

When the water tank is full, the dehumidifier lets out a series of beeps and then switches itself off. There is also a series of three wavy lines that lights up on the digital display to indicate the tank is at its limit.  At this stage, you simply pull out the water tank at the front of the unit and empty it out — you can use it to water your plants if you like.

There is a carry handle on top of the water tank which make it easy to transport and tip out. 

This model has a tank with a capacity of 6L. Running on full speed for six hours, my dehumidifier collected 2.17 litres.

What is the HEPA filter for?

This dehumidifier comes complete with a HEPA filter, in addition to the regular filter that it was fitted with.

HEPA stands for High Efficiency Particulate Air. A HEPA air filter is made up of thousands of very fine fibres compressed into a mat which can grab both microscopic particles as well as bigger ones. The HEPA filter that comes with the Meaco dehumidifier I am using can capture up to 99.97% of particles that are 0.3μm or more. It is really simple to pop the HEPA filter in and, once in place, all the air going through the dehumidifier is purified — great for anyone who might be allergic (or would just prefer to avoid) mould spores, pollen, dust, pet dander or dust mites. 

What extra features does the dehumidifier have?

Aside from those already noted, this dehumidifier comes with several other useful functions that are worth noting. These include: 

• Memory function/Auto re-start: This one was very useful. It means that even when you turn the machine off, when you switch it back on it will continue to run in the same settings you previously had it running on meaning you don't need to reset the whole thing. 
• Meaco Control Logic: This useful features means that when the relative humidity in your room is at more than 3%rh below your target, the dehumidifier will stop drying the air. If the relative humidity is then stable, the dehumidifier will go to sleep for 30 minutes. After this time, it wakes up, samples the air and if it senses the air is now more than 3%rh above your set point, it will start to dehumidify again. If all is well however, it will go to sleep for another 30 minutes. Great for saving energy. 
• Child lock: This would be really useful for those with little ones who might be tempted by flashing lights and an array of buttons. With the child lock activated the functions of the dehumidifier cannot be changed. 

Is the dehumidifier noisy?

According to the manufacturer's specifications, this dehumidifier has a noise level at one metre of a maximum of 46dB(A) — but what is that like to live with?

During the day, being located upstairs, the noise was barely noticeable. At nighttime, when all was quiet, the low humming could obviously be heard. However, it wasn't overbearing and as we found there was no need to run the dehumidifier overnight to achieve the desired results this proved not to be an issue. 

Do we recommend the Meaco 20L Low Energy Dehumidifier?

The Meaco 20L Low Energy Dehumidifier and Air Purifier costs approx. £259.99. They also do a smaller model, the Meaco 12L Low Energy Dehumidifier and Air Purifier, which costs £189.99 and is more suitable for small homes and flats. 

While it is definitely not the cheapest model on the market, you need to factor in the fact that this is a low energy dehumidifier, making it cheaper to run than many of these lower cost products. For example, we also  recently carried out a ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier Review. While this model only costs £199, the website states it has running costs of 14p/hour — more than double our model. 

To find out more about dehumidifiers and which ones we rate, read our best dehumidifier buying guide.

About this review

Homebuilding & Renovating is not given any compensation by Meaco for our reviews, but may be allowed to keep the product for long-term testing meaning we can test it over a greater length of time, and update this review if required.

As someone who lives in a listed building, getting rid of mould is often top of mind. As I mentioned in my recent review of the ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier, I've been fighting a constant battle with humidity levels and condensation causing mould on my walls for years, so I finally decided to invest in some decent dehumidifiers to tackle the problem. 

Having successfully got on top of condensation and mould in my home office, I turned to our guest bedroom where I required a much more affordable and compact solution. Thankfully, the Hysure 700ml Automatic Dehumidifier is available to buy on Amazon  for under £50 and it promised to be more energy-efficient, lighter and quieter than its competitors. 

Below, I share my thoughts on the performance of this affordable dehumidifier and whether I think it's worth the purchase. 

First impressions of the Hysure 700ml Automatic Dehumidifier

When I first opened up the box I was astonished by how lightweight this dehumidifier was – you can literally hold it up with one finger! It's a fairly sleek and modern looking dehumidifier, so it won't be out of place in a lot of homes. However, I believe you can also purchase the same model in black on Amazon Prime  if that's more your style. You can also buy a larger 2L version on Amazon for a bit more money too.

It's incredibly easy to assemble and get up and running. However, I wasn't too impressed by the short length of the power cable, as this made it difficult to position anywhere but against the wall. 

Specifications

• Brand: Hysure
• Material: ABS plastic
• Voltage: DC 9V
• Power: 23W
• Dimensions: 163 x 107 x 267mm
• Volume of tank: 700mL
• Efficiency: 300ml/day (at 30 ℃, 80% RH).
• Coverage: 15㎡
• Working temperature: 10-50 ℃

What features does the Hysure 700ml Automatic Dehumidifier have?

The Hysure 700ml Automatic Electric Dehumidifier is fairly limited in terms of its spec. However, it does boast the following features:

• Ultra-Quiet Technology: The Hysure dehumidifier uses 'peltier technology' with no compressor, making it extremely lightweight and quiet. It operates with minimal noise, allegedly allowing you to run it throughout the night without disturbing your sleep.
• Compact Size: This mini dehumidifier's small dimensions make it a convenient choice for a children's nursery or other small indoor spaces.
• 700ml Capacity Tank: The dehumidifier can extract up to 300 ml of moisture daily to help purify the air in small spaces.
• Energy Saving: The model brands itself as an environmentally friendly solution for absorbing damp and condensation in your home.
• Auto Shut Off: This portable moisture absorber automatically shuts itself off when the tank is full and ready for water to be emptied.

How well does it work?

In our guest bedroom we've been suffering from mould on our skirting boards. This is most likely caused by poor home ventilation allowing a build up of condensation and moisture to form in corners and behind furniture, resulting in mould growth. So I plugged in the Hysure 700ml Automatic Electric Dehumidifier and let it do its thing. 

The room is roughly 4m2 and I'm not sure if that strictly qualifies as a 'small' space, but based on the overall results, I'd say it doesn't. After running this dehumidifier in our home for the past 6 months, I've drawn the following conclusions:

Pros

• I've been impressed by its consistent performance. Unlike a similarly priced dehumidifier we had to return within 2 weeks of purchase as it broke, this one shows no signs of stopping anytime soon.
• This small dehumidifier lives up to its promise of quiet operation. The minimal ambient noise it generates doesn't disrupt a good night's sleep.
• Its compact and lightweight design makes it easy to disassemble and empty every few days.
• The automatic shut-off feature eliminates worries about your dehumidifier leaking all over the floor when you forget to empty it.
• In the corner where it was running I did notice a visible improvement to the mould on our skirting boards (see photos above). 

Cons

• The power cable is extremely short, so it has to be positioned close to a power source. 
• This model is suitable only for very small rooms. I ended up moving it into our 2m2 bathroom, as it didn't massively improve the condensation in the bedroom overall.
• If the noise doesn't affect your sleep, the LED light might. Unfortunately, there's no option to turn it off, so if you place this model in your bedroom, it will serve as an unintended night light as well
• 700ml is not a great deal of moisture and it takes roughly 2.5 days to extract this from the air.
• After 6 months of use I noticed a lot of discolouration inside the dehumidifier (see photos above).

How much does it cost to run?

Dehumidifier running costs will vary depending on the size and spec of your model. The Hysure 700ml Automatic Electric Dehumidifier is fairly inexpensive to run, costing mere pennies each day. This is particularly handy when you need to run it consistently. 

My thoughts on the Hysure 700ml Dehumidifier

This compact dehumidifier performs well for its size and has helped remove mould from the wall in places. However, if you have a serious underlying mould or damp issue in your home this is not the dehumidifier for you. The Hysure 700ml Automatic Electric Dehumidifier is an affordable dehumidifier priced under £50 and you should adjust your expectations accordingly. 

If price point is the main factor in your buying decisions then you can't go wrong with this model - especially if you're dealing with a minor condensation or occasional damp issues in a small bathroom or spare room. This dehumidifier is perfect if you're trying to achieve normal humidity in a house or you only have a small room to cover.

However, if you have significant issues with condensation then you should invest in a more serious piece of kit to ensure you have the best dehumidifier for the job. I recently reviewed a much larger and more expensive dehumidifier - the ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier available on Amazon - and I would recommend purchasing this model over the Hysure if you have a bigger home. 

An important update

Since I wrote this review my Hysure dehumidifier has broken. This is most likely because I failed to maintain the unit – following the manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and troubleshooting the problems I was experiencing. 

To avoid experiencing these issues with your own dehumidifier, I recommend weekly maintenance and cleaning. You should also ensure that you register your warranty online. If your dehumidifier breaks within its warranty you may be entitled to a replacement model free of charge. 

Dehumidifiers are a great way to reduce humidity, mould and condensation in your home. However, it is crucial to address any underling issues first by treating damp at the source and ensuring you have sufficient home ventilation to begin with. 

The Lawnmaster L10 robot mower is the perfect garden buddy if you want a lawn that looks lovely, but aren’t so keen on its upkeep. With this smart futuristic cutting companion there’s no pushing a mower around the garden. Simply set it up, hit Start and let the wonder of technology take over. All you need to do is sit back, relax, and take a sip on your favourite cocktail - or cup of tea - and watch the L10 majestically mow your lawn.

The Lawnmaster L10’s compact nature means it is meant for smaller gardens with a maximum recommended cutting area of 400m2. That’s 20m x 20m – or 65ft x 65 ft for imperial lovers. So still ideal for most suburban gardens and a little bit more. And just to make sure it got a good workout I left my lawn to grow for at least three weeks before giving the mower its first run out. 

Is it better than a push mower? Find out what we thought of the Lawnmaster L10 and whether or not it could be a real alternative to the best cordless lawn mowers on the market today. 

LawnMaster L10 specifications

• Lawn mower type: Robot mower
• Drive type: Automatic
• Cutting width: 18cm
• Cutting height: 20mm-60mm
• Weight: 8.1kg
• Rotary or cylinder: Rotary
• Guarantee: 2 years
• Charge time: 45 mins
• Cutting area: 400m2
  

First time with the LawnMaster L10

I’ve worked with some hefty robot mowers before so I was looking forward to working with a more compact and lightweight - or at least easier to lift - model, and that is exactly what I got with the LawnMaster L10.

Neatly packaged in recyclable cardboard emblazoned with the Lawnmaster logo, I could easily lift the box and manoeuvre it outside with no problem. The box itself is only 68cm x 46cm x 26cm and weighs around 10 kg including the mower, accessories and packaging.

Now it was time for the fun part – the unboxing. Revealing the L10 for the first time saw a neatly arranged box with some solid cardboard corner packaging to help ensure that the edges of the box didn’t collapse if hitting anything in transit. This ensured that the contents were in good shape and in working order once out of the box.  

The mower itself is resplendent in a favourite colour combination for many mowers – black and orange – and only took up three quarters of the box. The unit itself measures – approximately – 54cm x 34cm x 26cm, meaning it's smaller than most cordless lawn mowers and it has no handle to hinder storage, when, and if you put it away for the winter.

Sitting next to the mower is a box of accessories, which contains almost everything you need to set up the mower. There’s a 150m reel of boundary wire, 250 plastic pegs, a power cord, wire strippers, a set of couplers, an Allen key and four bast station fixing screws. Lifting the 8kg mower revealed the neatly tucked away base station. At first glance it seems like a lot, but we promise you it isn't as overwhelming as it looks. One thing we did notice that wasn’t in the box was a grass collector. Robot mowers don’t like to bother with such things, they like to mulch.  

Setting up the LawnMaster L10 was easy-ish

If you’ve never used a robot mower with a wire boundary before this is the most time consuming part. And you will need a rubber mallet and a pair of pliers. You need to lay the wire around the boundary of your lawn and peg down, so the bigger your garden the longer it will take. I have a 40m2 garden with straight edges most of the way all the way, so my setup was quite straight forward. 

If there are any obstacles it is recommended that you go around at 90 degree angles. It took me around 20 minutes from start to finish, but this didn’t include mowing around the edges before laying, reading the instructions (beforehand) and connecting up the base station. So in reality, you need to allocate yourself at least an hour to get everything in place. Make sure you follow the manufacturer’s recommendations, because once you're past the initial set up there’s not much to do apart from use the mower.  

There are a few rules that you need to follow to help the Lawnmaster L10 stick to the boundary and not run over the wire and attack your flower beds. First rule is that you need to keep the boundary wire taut, and the second rule is if you have a small dip in your lawn don’t cross the dip, peg the wire to the bottom of the dip.

With the boundary wire in place you need to finish the set up by connecting to the base station and a power outlet. On the plus side the L10 comes with a long power cable which gives you options to place the charging base pretty much wherever you want without the need for an extension cable.

Wiring up the perimeter cable wasn’t as easy as I hoped, but it was still reasonably straightforward. You need to read the instructions carefully and thoroughly to make sure everything is in the right place. And you will need to cut the wire to the right length, strip the wire’s casing and connect. You get a wire stripper included but it was still a little fiddly, but it's pretty much the same for most robot lawn mowers. 

Let the LawnMaster L10 mow

Every time I test a lawnmower I leave my lawn to grow to around 4 inches (100mm) to give it a good test. The Lawnmaster L10 has varied cutting heights from 20-60mm, so I set the first run at 60mm using the large orange twist handle. This has markings for different heights, but felt a little clunky when changing heights, but it worked effectively. 

If you have a longer lawn you might need to get out your grass trimmer before letting the LawnMaster do its thing. In fact, like every mower you are still going to need a trimmer to finish the edges and the L10 is no different. You can adjust the perimeter wire to get closer to the edges. But, it's worth noting that the mower follows the wire back to the charging station when you press the Home button, so it's best to stick to the recommended distance.

Now we were finally ready for the first cut. You need to pull the cover on the top of the Lawnmaster to reveal its simple control panel. There’s no app here, so you need to be hands on. There’s a home, lock, OK and Start button along with scheduling buttons. You can choose how long to run it each day or alternative days with a simple press. We would have liked to see more scheduling options, but there is always the option to start manually when you want. There is a sequence you need to follow which includes the default PIN number (it's in the instruction manual) to start mowing. We forgot the sequence the second time around so it was back to the manual, but it's really not difficult. 

How well does the LawnMaster L10 cut?

Like most robot mowers the L10 uses three small blades to cut the grass and they did a decent job. But – there’s always a but isn't there – the mower uses a random pattern which we found confusing. And, if we didn’t leave running long enough it missed small patches of grass. The first time we left it running for 30 mins to get the lawn in a decent state. For consecutive cuts we dropped the cutting height to 20 mm and ran for about 15-20 mins.

This gave a good finish, as good as my Mountfield cordless lawn mower. And, if it hits an obstacle it has bump collision detection, which means it simply reverses and carries on. You will need to hit the Stop button to stop mowing and hit the Home button to send it back to base and ready to recharge. To fully recharge takes around 45 minutes, but we recharged after each cut so the L10 was always ready for action.

What else does the LawnMaster L10 have to offer?

 The option to set up a mowing schedule means you can leave the LawnMaster L10 to do its things on a regular basis. But if you do, rain is almost certain to come your way at some point. So can you leave outside? The L10 has an IPX rating of 5 which means it is protected against low pressure water from any angle, so the answer is yes. But, we kept ours covered in heavy rain and at night. And, there is a rain sensor that ensures that the mower doesn’t attempt to cut grass when wet.

The IPX rating also means you can easily wash the L10 without having to worry about water ingress. You don’t need a high powered pressure washer to clean, just standard hose pressure will suffice.

There isn’t a grass collector, which has its pros and cons. It means there is less to store in your shed and the cuttings are left to mulch. Which in some cases isn’t always the ideal choice. While not perfect the LawnMaster L10 is definitely a contender if you have a small/medium lawn and want a straightforward robot mower that does what it's supposed to do – cut your grass. 

As someone who lives in a listed building, the ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier promised a solution to the pervasive nuisance of damp and mould that was plaguing my home.  

For the past few years, I've been fighting a constant battle with humidity levels in my home office, failing to get on top of the problem with cheap dehumidifiers and damp absorbers. So, when I read that the ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier – available to buy on Amazon – can remove up to 20L of moisture per day, I knew I had to give it a whirl. 

Below, I share my thoughts on the performance of this 'premium' dehumidifier and whether I think it's worth the price tag. 

First impressions of the ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier

The ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier is a sleek and surprisingly lightweight unit. I found the unboxing process to be hassle-free, as the box contained just the right amount of packaging, ensuring there was no damage to the product and avoiding excessive waste. 

Getting the dehumidifier setup was straightforward and intuitive. The ProBreeze comes with a clear drainage tube, a user manual, and four wheels that make manoeuvring the product around your home a breeze. I simply had to wheel it into my home office, remove the main power cord from the back and plug it in. 

It was a good first impression. Though this dehumidifier is not small, it's easy to move about and setup, and it isn't too much of an eyesore. 

Specifications

• Name: ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier with Special Laundry Mode 
• Type: Compressor 
• Filter: Washable nylon filter +carbon filter 
• Timer: 24 hr Max 
• Extraction: 20L 
• Dimensions: 350 x 200 x 608mm (LWH) 
• Weight: 13g 

What features does the ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier have?

With its promise of premium quality, I was keen to see what features the ProBreeze has. Overall, I'd say that the spec of this product really does hold water (and not just in the literal sense). Amongst its many functions, the ProBreeze has the following features: 

• 5 operation modes: Including 'strong', 'natural', 'ventilation', 'continuous', and 'laundry'. There's also a child safety lock for safeguarding these settings from little fingers. 
• Special laundry mode: During cold and wet months this mode is useful for drying your clothes indoors, as it absorbs atmospheric moisture and allegedly extracts up to 600% more water than other leading dehumidifiers (according to the ProBreeze website). 
• Cost-effective operation: The ProBreeze is an energy-efficient workhorse, extracting up to 20 litres of water daily, costing as little as 14p/hour to run.
• Automated humidity detection: Intelligent colour-changing LED humidity sensors monitor the rooms moisture levels, auto-regulating the unit for optimal humidity.
• Large water tank: The ample 5.5L water tank conveniently shuts off when full and the ProBreeze comes with a continuous drainage hose that can be inserted directly into a drain if required.
• Carbon filter: A detachable, washable carbon filter at the back of the machine ensures the air stays clean and healthy.

How well does it work?

Our old home, with its single-glazed windows and substantial granite walls, has long been a bastion for dampness. Over the years we've haemorrhaged money on cheap dehumidifiers and damp absorbers to no avail. 

Pre-ProBreeze, our home office was practically uninhabitable at times with damp walls collecting mould and condensation. But after one week of introducing the ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier we've experienced a marked improvement. There is visibly less dampness, a palpable freshness to the air, and crucially, dry floors and walls.

We didn't run the dehumidifier continuously but we still managed to empty the 5.5L tank five times and I was shocked to see that our humidity level had consistently been at an 80% rh level for some time (UK homes should be around the 50-55% rh range and be slightly lower in winter months). 

However, it's worth noting that the ProBreeze does generate a bit of noise – bearable during the day, but perhaps too intrusive for night-time operation.

How much does it cost to run?

When my friend first saw the size of the 20L ProBreeze she scoffed that it would cost me a small fortune to run, but the change to my electricity bill has been unnoticeable. Although the website proposes a 14p / hour operation cost, ours is seemingly costing us a mere 8p/ hour.

We typically never run the dehumidifier for longer than 2-3 hours at a time, due to its noisy nature. However only running it for a few hours a day still seems to do the trick and saves us quite a bit of money in the process. 

Should you buy the ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier?

As a long time damp sufferer, I absolutely recommend The ProBreeze 20L Premium Dehumidifier. Not only has it protected our belongings from the pervasive menace of mould but it has helped us to reduce humidity levels, and allowed us to use our home office again without worrying about our belongings being ruined by damp. 

At £199.99, it doesn’t position itself as the budget option and this may be a barrier to some homeowners. However, I view this dehumidifier as a valuable investment in regards to the long-term savings we'll make a a household fighting damp. 

A palpably fresher home and peace of mind makes this a 4.5 / 5 stars for me and worthy of a place on the best dehumidifier list! 

The Stoves Richmond 100PYR Pyramid Chimney can be used either as a recirculating cooker hood, or as a ducted, extracting cooker hood. It’s all down to how you set it up. If you decide to use this chimney as an extracting cooker hood, you’ll need to purchase additional ducting with fittings, so that you can channel cooking fumes from the cooker hood to an outlet on an external wall.

For this review, I installed the 100PYR as a recirculating cooker hood, which means the air that passes through its filters and fan gets cycled back into the kitchen. The findings published here will reflect that choice. 

It’s worth bearing in mind that this is a relatively large type of cooker hood. At about one metre wide, the appliance is suitable for use with many range cookers, as well as with standard 60 cm ones. This might rule the 100PYR out for some kitchens, although we think it looks good enough to be a large statement piece in most kitchens – even smaller ones.

Stoves Richmond 100PYR product specifics

• Warranty length: two years 
• Type of cooker hood: extracting or recirculating chimney (depending on installation)
• Filters Required: 3 x washable grease filters; 1 x charcoal filter 
• Number of fan speeds: three 
• Extraction rate: ranges from 300 ㎥/h (minimum) to 610 ㎥/h (maximum)
• Additional features: timed boost 
• Dimensions: 998 mm x 542.5 mm

Setup and maintenance

Installation: Installing and setting up the 100PYR as a recirculating cooker hood only took me an afternoon. However, had I been installing the appliance as an extracting cooker hood, the time and effort required would have been greater. 

If you’re comfortable with DIY, you’ll hopefully be able to install the 100PYR without hiring a professional. However, it must be said that the installation instructions in the manual are not especially clear or thorough. Confusingly, the instruction manual seems to indicate that you need to buy some additional ducting if using the product as a recirculating cooker hood. I called the Stoves team to check, and they assured me that this would not be the case. 

You can read my full account of setting up this particular cooker hood in my guide: how to fit a recirculating cooker hood. Do make sure that you have a power outlet ready in the right position for the cooker hood, before you buy. 

Maintenance: Once you’ve got it set up, the 100PYR is no trouble to keep in good condition. The surfaces wipe clean easily, and the dark colour of the appliance can minimise the appearance of marks between cleans (although it does highlight dust). 

It’s incredibly easy to insert or remove the grease and carbon filters from the 100PYR, using their user-friendly installation mechanisms - just remember to remove the blue protective material from the grease filters before use. The grease filters need to be taken out and washed from time to time, either by hand or in the dishwasher. This quick task greatly extends the filters’ lifespan, relative to a non-washable alternative. Meanwhile, the charcoal filters (for recirculating use) are non-washable. Replacing the 100PYR’s filters is a repeating cost, which you should take into consideration before purchasing the appliance. 

Performance and design

Usability: The 100PYR is exceptionally easy to use. You simply press one of the three numbered control buttons to activate the fan at your desired speed setting, and press the power button to turn it off. That’s all there is to it! 

Style: It’s a fantastic-looking cooker hood, with a timeless chimney design that can change the look and feel of a kitchen for the better. The components feel robust and well-made – especially the rail on the front of the hood. What's more, while the 100PYR looks great at any time, it comes into its own at night, when the mellow glow of the in-built LED lights can really transform the ambience of your kitchen. A cooker hood may be less important than the cooker itself, but this one somehow feels like the heart of the kitchen. 

Function: During my hands-on testing, the 100PYR did a great job of capturing and recirculating air from my cooker. From boiling water and simmering sauces, to sizzling bacon and scrambling eggs, the cooker hood has visibly drawn in the fumes from every item I’ve cooked on the hob, since installation. For the first time in years, I’ve been able to fry bacon to the point of a perfect crispiness, without worrying about setting the fire alarm off! Furthermore, the 100PYR has proven sufficiently powerful to capture air from the oven and grill. 

A good indicator of the cooker hood’s effectiveness was that it successfully neutralised the smells of cooking food. Without entirely removing aromas, the 100PYR seemed to reduce the prevalence of oily, greasy smells. My partner – who is more attuned to such things than I am – said that the house now smells fresher, during cooking. 

Pete's top tip: You’ll probably want to use the 100PYR’s medium and high fan speeds sparingly, as the cooker hood is pretty noisy when used in these modes. Thankfully, the slowest setting is powerful enough to deal with most meals. You’ll probably only need the higher settings at times when your cooking is giving off a lot of steam or fumes – for example, when you are frying or grilling at a high temperature.  

Should you buy the 100PYR?

One factor that might work against the 100PYR is affordability. It's on the upper end of the market, although its RRP of £549.00 is lower than some premium models sold by brands such as Miele and Airforce. And when you factor in the recurring costs of replacing the 100PYR’s grease filters and charcoal filters, this is a pretty expensive product. 

The 100PYR’s functions are essentially similar to what you’d get with many models of cooker hood that come at a lower price point. What you’re really paying for here is the cooker hood's style, performance and quality of components.

If you want to complete your kitchen with a statement piece that combines style and substance, this ambience-altering cooker hood will be well worth the investment.